Manual 2005 Sonata

2005

A010A02A-AAT

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAI VEHICLE

o New Vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles Limited Warrantyo New Vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Limited Powertrain Warranty (original owner only)o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System Warranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty - Federal Vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is provided in your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

A020A01A-AAT

RESPONSIBILITY FOR MAINTENANCE

The maintenance requirements for your new Hyundai are found in Section 5. As the owner, it is your responsibilityto see that all maintenance operations specified by the manufacturer are carried out at the appropriate intervals.When the vehicle is used in severe driving conditions, more frequent maintenance is required for some operations.Maintenance requirements for severe operating conditions are also included in Section 5.

OWNER'S MANUAL

A030A01NF-AAT

OperationMaintenanceSpecifications

All information in this Owner's Manual is current at the time of publication. However, Hyundai reserves the right to make changes at anytime so that our policy of continual product improvement may be carried out.

This manual applies to all Hyundai models and includes descriptions and explanations of optional as well as standardequipment. As a result, you may find material in this manual that does not apply to your specific vehicle.

A030A01NF-A

A070A01A-AAT

CAUTION: MODIFICATIONS TO YOUR HYUNDAI

Your Hyundai should not be modified in any way. Such modifications may adversely affect the performance, safetyor durability of your Hyundai and may, in addition, violate conditions of the limited warranties covering the vehicle.Certain modifications may also be in violation of regulations established by the U.S. Department of Transportationand other federal or state agencies.

A080A01S-AAT

TWO-WAY RADIO OR CELLULAR TELEPHONE INSTALLATION

Your vehicle is equipped with electronic fuel injection and other electronic components. It is possible for animproperly installed/adjusted two-way radio or cellular telephone to adversely affect electronic systems. For thisreason, we recommend that you carefully follow the radio manufacturer's instructions or consult your Hyundaidealer for precautionary measures or special instructions if you choose to install one of these devices.

!

A040A01A-AAT

FOREWORD

Thank you for choosing Hyundai. We are pleased to welcome you to the growing number of discriminating people whodrive Hyundais. The advanced engineering and high-quality construction of each Hyundai we build is something of whichwe're very proud.

Your Owner's Manual will introduce you to the features and operation of your new Hyundai. It is suggested that you readit carefully because the information it contains can contribute greatly to the satisfaction you receive from your new car.

The manufacturer also recommends that all service and maintenance on your car be performed by an authorized Hyundaidealer. Hyundai dealers are prepared to provide high-quality service, maintenance and any other assistance that maybe required.

A050A04A-AAT

HYUNDAI MOTOR COMPANY

Note : Because future owners will also need the information included in this manual, if you sell this Hyundai, please leavethe manual in the vehicle for their use. Thank you.

CAUTION:Severe engine and transaxle damage may result from the use of poor quality fuels and lubricants that do notmeet Hyundai specifications. You must always use high quality fuels and lubricants that meet the specifica-tions listed on Page 9-4 in the Vehicle Specifications section of the Owner's Manual and which also appearin the Service Station Information on the back cover of the Owner's Manual.

Copyright 2005 Hyundai Motor Company. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored inany retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means without the prior written permission of Hyundai MotorCompany.

!

A090A01A-AAT

SAFETY AND VEHICLE DAMAGE WARNING

This manual includes information titled as WARNING, CAUTION and NOTE.These titles indicate the following:

WARNING:This indicates that a condition may result in harm, serious injury or death to you or other persons ifthe warning is not heeded. Follow the advice provided with the warning.

CAUTION:This indicates that a condition may result in damage to your vehicle or its equipment if the caution isnot heeded. Follow the advice provided with the caution.

NOTE:This indicates that interesting or helpful information is being provided.

!

!

TABLE OF CONTENTS

SECTION 5

1

2

3

4

6

7

8

9

10

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS &BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

INDEX

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (I)

B250A01NF-AAT

B250A01NF-A

1. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Switch2. Power Adjustable Pedals Switch (If Installed)3. Panel Brightness Control Knob (Rheostat Switch)4. Hood Release Lever5. Steering Wheel Tilt Lever (If Installed)6. Front Seat Warmer (If Installed)

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.

!

7. Power Outlet8. Ashtray9. Cigarette Lighter10.Digital Clock11."PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator12.Hazard Warning Switch

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS (II)

B250B01NF-AAT

B250A02NF-A

1. Fuse Box2. Multi Box3. Instrument Cluster4. Multi-Function Light/Front Fog Light Switch5. Audio Remote Control Switch (If Installed)6. Horn and Driver's Airbag7. Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch8. Cruise Control Switch

CAUTION:When installing a container of liquid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster noron the instrument panel surface. If there is any leakage from the air freshener onto these areas (Instrument cluster,instrument panel or air ventilator), it may damage these parts. If the liquid from the air freshener does leak onto theseareas, wash them with water immediately.

!

9. Audio System (If Installed)10. Passenger's Airbag11. Glove Box12. Heating/Air Conditioning Control Panel13. Shift Lever14. Parking Brake Lever15. Drink Holder16. Center Console

YOUR VEHICLE AT A GLANCE

B255A01NF-AAT

INDICATOR SYMBOLS ON THE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

High Beam Indicator Light

Door Ajar Warning Light

Seat Belt Reminder Light

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

ABS Service Reminder Indicator (If Installed)

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level

Warning Light

Charging System Warning Light

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

Cruise Indicator Light

Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) IndicatorLights (If Installed)

Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light

Front Fog Light Indicator Light

Cruise SET Indicator Light

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

* More detailed explanations of these items will be found beginning on page 1-52.

A100A03A-AAT

Guide to Hyundai Genuine Parts1. What are Hyundai Genuine Parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are the same partsused by Hyundai Motor Company to manu-facture vehicles. They are designed andtested for the optimum safety, performance,and reliability to our customers.

2. Why should you use genuine parts?

Hyundai Genuine Parts are engineered andbuilt to meet rigid manufacturing require-ments. Using imitation, counterfeit or usedsalvage parts is not covered under theHyundai New Vehicle Limited Warranty orany other Hyundai warranty. In addition, anydamage to or failure of Hyundai GenuineParts caused by the installation or failure of

an imitation, counterfeit or used salvage partis not covered by any Hyundai Warranty.

3. How can you tell if you are purchasingHyundai Genuine Parts?

Look for the Hyundai Genuine Parts Logo onthe package (see below).

Hyundai Genuine Parts exported to the UnitedStates are packaged with labels written onlyin English.

Hyundai Genuine Parts are only sold throughauthorized Hyundai Dealerships.

To find the closest authorized dealer call1-800-826-CARS

A100A01L A100A02L A100A04L

A100A03L

1Fuel Recommendations ....................................................1-2Breaking in Your New Hyundai .........................................1-3Keys ...................................................................................1-3Door Locks ........................................................................1-4Theft-Alarm System ..........................................................1-8Windows ..........................................................................1-11Seats ................................................................................1-14Seat Belts ........................................................................1-21Child Restraint System ....................................................1-28Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ................................................................1-36Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights .........................1-50Warning and Indicator Lights ..........................................1-52Trip Computer .................................................................1-58Multi-Function Light Switch .............................................1-61Windshield Wiper and Washer Switch ............................1-64Sunroof ............................................................................1-70Mirror ...............................................................................1-77Homelink Mirror ...............................................................1-79Hood Release ..................................................................1-89Cruise Control ..................................................................1-93Heating and Cooling Control ...........................................1-96Stereo Sound System .................................................. 1-113Audio System................................................................ 1-115Antenna ........................................................................ 1-130

FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

1

1FEATURES OF YOUR HYUNDAI

2

B010A01NF-A

FUEL RECOMMENDATIONS

CAUTION:Your Hyundai's New Vehicle Limited War-ranty may not cover damage to the fuelsystem and any performance problems thatare caused by the use of fuels containingmethanol or fuels containing MTBE (MethylTertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxy-gen Content 2.7% weight.)

B010B01A-AAT

What About Gasohol?

Gasohol (a mixture of 90% unleaded gasolineand 10% ethanol or grain alcohol) may be usedin your Hyundai. However, if your engine devel-ops driveability problems, the use of 100%unleaded gasoline is recommended. Fuels withunspecified quantities of alcohol, or alcoholsother than ethanol, should not be used.

B010A01NF-AAT

Use Unleaded Gasoline

Unleaded gasoline with a Pump OctaneRating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91)or higher must be used in your Hyundai.

B010C01A-AAT

Use of MTBE

Hyundai recommends that fuels containingMTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0%vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) should notbe used in your Hyundai.Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (OxygenContent 2.7% weight) may reduce vehicle per-formance and produce vapor lock or hardstarting.

B010D01A-AAT

Do Not Use Methanol

Fuels containing methanol (wood alcohol) shouldnot be used in your Hyundai. This type of fuelcan reduce vehicle performance and damagecomponents of the fuel system.

!

!

UNLEADEDFUEL ONLY

CAUTION:o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzle

shut off when refueling.o The fuel cap must be tightened until cap

clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.


3KEYSBREAKING IN YOUR NEW HYUNDAI

B010F01A-AAT

Operation in Foreign Countries

If you are going to drive your Hyundai in anothercountry, be sure to:

o Observe all regulations regarding registra-tion and insurance.

o Determine that acceptable fuel is available.

B010E01A-AAT

Gasolines for Cleaner Air

To help contribute to cleaner air, Hyundai rec-ommends that you use gasolines treated withdetergent additives, which help prevent depositformation in the engine. These gasolines willhelp the engine run cleaner and enhance per-formance of the Emission Control System.

B020A01S-AAT

During the First 1,200 Miles (2,000 Km)

No formal "break-in" procedure is required withyour new Hyundai. However, you can contrib-ute to the economical operation and durability ofyour Hyundai by observing the following recom-mendations during the first 1,200 miles (2,000km).

o Don't drive faster than 55 MPH (88 km/h).o While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm,

or revolutions per minute) between 2,000rpm and 4,000 rpm.

o Use moderate acceleration. Don't startquickly or depress the accelerator pedalfully.

o For the first 200 miles (300 km), try to avoidhard stops.

o Don't lug the engine (in other words, don'tdrive so slowly in too high a gear that theengine "bucks":shift to a lower gear).

o Whether going fast or slow, vary your speedfrom time to time.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than 3 minutesat one time.

o Don't tow a trailer during the first 1,200 miles(2,000 km) of operation.

B030A01NF-GAT

For greater convenience, your Hyundai hastwo master keys and a sub key. The masterkeys will open all locks on your vehicle. The subkey will only function in the ignition and the doorlocks.

Leaving your sub key with a parking attendantwill ensure that your vehicle's trunk, trunk lidrelease, glove box compartment and rear trunkaccess may not be unlocked in your absence.

NOTE:Before leaving your sub key with a parkingattendant, make sure that the lock knobs ofthe rear seatback lock and the trunk lid lockare switched to the "LOCK" position.

B030A01NF

Master keySub key


4 DOOR LOCKS

!B040A01A-AATB030C01JM-AAT

ILLUMINATED IGNITION SWITCH

Whenever either front door is opened, the igni-tion switch will be illuminated for your conve-nience, provided the ignition switch is not in the"ON" position.The light will go off approximately 10 secondsafter closing the door or when the ignition switchis turned on.

WARNING:o Unlocked doors can be dangerous. Be-

fore you drive away (especially if thereare children in the car), be sure that all thedoors are securely closed and locked sothat the doors cannot be opened fromthe inside. This helps ensure that thedoors will not be opened accidentally.Also, when combined with the properuse of seat belts, locking the doors helpskeep occupants from being ejected fromthe car in case of an accident.

o Before opening the door, always look forand avoid oncoming traffic.

B030B01NF-GAT

Record Your Key Number

A code number is attached on the number tagthat came with the keys to your Hyundai. Thiskey number tag should not be left with the keysbut kept in a safe place, not in the vehicle. Thekey number should also be recorded in a placewhere it can be found in an emergency.If you need additional keys, or if you should loseyour keys, your authorized Hyundai dealer canmake new keys if you can supply the keynumber.

B030B01NF B030C01E


5

B040B01JM-AAT

Locking, unlocking front doors with akey

o The door can be locked or unlocked with akey.

o Lock the door by turning the key toward thefront of the vehicle and unlock it by turning thekey toward the rear.

NOTE:The driver's door can be unlocked by turn-ing the key once toward the rear. If you wishto unlock all doors, turn the key againtoward the rear within 4 seconds. Thepassenger's side will lock or unlock alldoors with just one rotation.

B040C02Y-AAT

Locking from the Outside

The doors can be locked without a key. To lockthe doors from the outside, first push the insidelock switch to the "LOCK" position, so that thered mark on the switch is not visible, then closethe door.The door will not lock if the key is left in the ignitionswitch when the front doors are closed. This isnormal.

NOTE:o When locking the door this way, be care-

ful not to lock the door with the key leftin the vehicle.

o To discourage theft, always remove theignition key, close all windows and lockall doors when leaving your vehicle un-attended.

HNF2007

LOCK

UNLOCK

B040C01NF-A

B040D01NF-AAT

Locking from the Inside

To lock the doors from the inside, simply closethe door and push the lock switch to the "LOCK"position.

NOTE:o When the door is locked, the red mark on

the switch is not visible.o The driver's and front passenger's doors

can be opened by pulling the inside doorhandle even if the inside lock switch ispushed to the "LOCK" position.

HNF2008

LOCKUNLOCK


6

B040E04A-AAT

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock

Your Hyundai is equipped with left and right side"child-protector" rear door locks. When the lockmechanism is engaged, the rear door cannot beopened from the inside. Its use is recommendedwhenever there are small children in the rearseat.

To engage the child-protector feature so thatthe door cannot be opened from the inside,move the child-protector lever to the " "position and close the door. Move the lever tothe " " position when normal door operationis desired.

To open the door from the outside, pull theoutside door handle.

HNF2011-1

B040G01NF-AAT

Central Door Locks

The central door locking switch is located on thedriver's and front passenger's armrest. It isoperated by depressing the door lock switch. Ifany door is open when the switch is depressedto the "LOCK" position, the door will remainlocked when closed.

NOTE:o When depressing the front portion of

the driver's or front passenger's doorlock switch, all vehicle doors will lock.

o When depressing the rear portion ofthese switches, all vehicle doors willunlock.

B040G01NF

Driver's side

Front passenger's sideLOCK UNLOCK

LOCKUNLOCKWARNING:Be careful not to pull the inside door handlewhile driving. If you pull the inside doorhandle, the door can be opened and youmay be ejected from the vehicle and can beinjured or killed.

!


7

!WARNING:

Be careful not to pull the inside door handlewhile driving. If you pull the inside doorhandle, the door can be opened and youmay be ejected from the vehicle and can beinjured or killed.

o The driver's and front passenger's doorscan be opened by pulling the inside doorhandle even if the front portion of thedriver's or front passenger's central doorlocking switch has been depressed tolock the doors.

B070F01NF-AAT

KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM

NOTE:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful in-terference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including inter-ference that may cause undesired opera-tion.

CAUTION:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Locking doors

1. Close all doors.2. Push the "LOCK ( )" button on the trans-

mitter.3. At the same time, all doors lock and the turn

signal lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

Unlocking doors

1. Push the "UNLOCK ( )" button on thetransmitter.

2. At the same time, the driver's door unlocksand the turn signal lights will blink twice toindicate that the system is disarmed.

NOTE:If you wish to unlock all the doors, press the"UNLOCK" button on the transmitter againwithin 4 seconds.

Releasing the trunk lid

Push the trunk lid release button ( ) on thetransmitter for longer than 1 second.

!

B040H02NF-GAT

Speed Sensing Auto Door Locking(If Installed)

When the speed of the vehicle keeps above thespecific speed for 1 second, it will automaticallylock all doors for driver and passenger's safety.For further information, contact an authorizedHyundai dealer.


8

2) Make sure that the engine hood and trunk lidare closed and latched.

3) Lock the doors using the transmitter of thekeyless entry system.

After completion of the steps above, the turnsignal lights will blink once to indicate that thesystem is armed.

NOTE:1) If any door, trunk lid or engine hood

remains open, the system will not bearmed.

2) If this happens, rearm the system aspreviously described.

NOTE:Do not arm the system until all passengershave left the car. If the system is armed whilea passenger(s) remains in the car, the alarmmay be activated when the remainingpassenger(s) leaves the car.

B070C01NF-AAT

Alarm Stage

The alarm will be activated if any of the followingoccurs while the car is parked and the systemis armed.

1) A front or rear door is opened without usingthe transmitter or the ignition key.

2) The trunk lid is opened without using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

3) The engine hood is opened.

The alarming horn will sound and the turn signallights will blink continuously for 27 seconds(This will repeat 3 times). To turn off the system,unlock the door or trunk lid with the transmitteror the ignition key.

B070C01NF-A

THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM

B070A01A-AAT

This system is designed to provide protectionfrom unauthorized entry into the car. This sys-tem is operated in three stages : the first is the"Armed" stage, the second is the "Alarm" stageand the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If trig-gered, the system provides an audible alarmwith blinking of the turn signal lights.

B070B01NF-AAT

Armed Stage

B070B01NF-A

Lock

UnlockTrunk Unlock

Park the car and stop the engine. Arm thesystem as described below.

1) Remove the ignition key from the ignitionswitch.


9

B070D01NF-AAT

Disarmed Stage

The system will be disarmed by using thetransmitter or the ignition key.

Only the driver's door is unlocked by depress-ing once the "UNLOCK ( )" button on thetransmitter. If you wish to unlock all doors, pressthe "UNLOCK ( )" button on the transmitteragain within 4 seconds.

Whenever the step above is completed, the turnsignal lights will blink twice to indicate that thesystem is disarmed.

If any door, trunk lid or engine hood is not openedor the ignition key is not inserted in the ignitionswitch within 30 seconds, the system will berearmed.

NOTE:When the system is disarmed while the"DOOR" button of the interior light is de-pressed, the interior light will illuminate for30 seconds.

CAUTION:Avoid trying to start the engine while thesystem is armed.

!B070E01NF-AAT

Panic Warning

1. Push the "PANIC" button on the backside ofthe transmitter.

2. At the same time, the alarming horn willsound and the turn signal lights will blinkcontinuously for 30 seconds.

3. To turn off the system, push the "PANIC"button again on the backside of the transmit-ter.

B070E02NF-A

B070E01NF-GAT

Replacing the battery

When the transmitter's battery begins to getweak, it may take several pushes on the buttonto lock or unlock the doors, and the LED will notlight. Replace the battery as soon as possible.

Battery type : CR2032

Replacement instructions:

1. Carefully separate the case with a coin asshown in the illustration.

B070E01NF


10

HNF2005

Battery

2. Remove the old battery from the case andnote the polarity. Make sure the polarity ofthe new battery is the same(+side facing up),then insert it in the transmitter.


11WINDOWS

HNF2017-1

1. Driver's door power window switch2. Front passenger's door power window switch3. Rear passenger's door power window switch

(left side)4. Rear passenger's door power window switch

(right side)5. Window lock switch

B060D01NF-GAT


12

B060A01NF-GAT

POWER WINDOWS

The power windows operate when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. The main switchesare located on the driver's armrest and controlthe front and rear windows on both sides of thevehicle. The windows may be opened by de-pressing the appropriate window switch andclosed by pulling up the switch. To open thewindow on the driver's side, press the switchhalfway down. The window moves as long asthe switch is operated.

B060A01NF

Window lock (Driver's side)

HNF2019-A

Auto Up/Down Window(Driver's side)

The auto up/down window is controlled by themain switch on the driver's armrest.To fully open the window automatically, pressthe switch fully down. To fully close the windowautomatically, pull the switch fully up. In auto-matic operation, the window will fully open orclose even if you let go of the switch. To stop thewindow at the desired position while the windowis in operation, pull up or depress and releasethe switch to the opposite direction of the move-ment.

NOTE:If the battery has been recharged or discon-nected, the auto up/down window systemmust be reset as follows;

1. Turn the ignition key to "ON" position.2. Pull up the driver's window switch until

the window is fully closed and continuepulling up the driver's window switchfor at least 0.2 second.

If the auto up/down window is not reset, itmay not operate properly.

Open Close

In order to prevent operation of the passengerfront and rear windows, a window lock switch isprovided on the armrest of the driver's door. Todisable the power windows, press the windowlock switch. To revert to normal operation,press the window lock switch a second time.


13

!

!

HNF2018

CloseOpen

WARNING:o Be careful that someone's head, hands

and body are not trapped by a closingwindow.

o Never try to operate the main switch onthe driver's door and the individual doorwindow switch in opposing directionsat the same time. If this is done, thewindow will stop and cannot be openedor closed.

o Do not leave children alone in the car.o Never leave the ignition key in the car.WARNING:

o The automatic reverse window will onlyoperate when the automatic up windowoperation feature is used. The automaticreverse feature of the window will notoperate if the window is raised using thehalfway position on the power windowswitch.

o If an object less than 0.16 in.(4 mm) indiameter is caught between the windowglass and the upper window channel,the automatic reverse window may notdetect the resistance and will not stopand reverse direction. Therefore, alwayscheck for any obstructions before rais-ing any window.

B060C01NF-AAT

Automatic Reverse Window(Driver's side)

If the upward movement of the window is blockedby an object or part of the body, the window willdetect the resistance and will stop upwardmovement. The window will then lower approxi-mately 11.8 in.(30cm) to allow the object to becleared.

NOTE:The power windows can be operated for 30seconds after the ignition key is turned tothe "ACC" or "LOCK" positions, or removedfrom the ignition switch.If the front doors are opened during this 30second period, the power windows can nolonger be operated without the ignition keyturned to the "ON" position.


14

!

B080B02A-AAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

To move the seat toward the front or rear, pullthe lock release lever upward. This will releasethe seat on its track so you can move it forwardor rearward to the desired position. When youfind the position you want, release the lever andslide the seat forward or rearward on its trackuntil it locks into the desired position and cannotbe moved further.

B080C01A-AAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

To recline the seatback, lean forward to takeyour weight off it, then pull up on the reclinercontrol lever at the outside edge of the seat. Nowlean back until the desired seatback angle isachieved. To lock the seatback into position,release the recliner control lever.

WARNING:To ensure the seat is locked securely, at-tempt to move the seat forward or rearwardwithout using the lock release lever.

SEATS

B080A01A-AAT

ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATS

! WARNING:Never attempt to adjust the seat while thevehicle is moving. This could result in lossof control or an accident which may causedeath, serious injury, or property damage.

HNF2032 HNF2033


15

! WARNING:To minimize risk of severe injury in theevent of a collision or a sudden stop, boththe driver and passenger seatbacks shouldalways be in an upright position while thevehicle is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags may bereduced significantly when the seatbacksare reclined. There is greater risk that thedriver and passenger will slide under theseat belt which may result in serious injuryif a crash occurs when the seatbacks arereclined.The seat belt cannot provide full protectionto an occupant if the seat back is reclined.

!B080D02JM-AAT

Adjustable Headrests

Headrests are designed to help reduce the riskof neck injuries.To raise the headrest, pull it up. To lower it, pushit down while pressing the lock knob. To removethe headrest, raise it as far as it can go thenpress the lock knob while pulling upward. Thisshould only be done when the seat is notoccupied.

WARNING:

o For maximum effectiveness in case of anaccident the headrest should be ad-justed so the middle of the headrest is atthe same height as the top of theoccupant's eyes. For this reason, theuse of a cushion that holds the bodyaway from the seatback is not recom-mended.

o Do not operate the vehicle with the head-rests removed as injury to the occupantsmay occur in the event of an accident.Headrests may provide protection againstneck injuries when properly adjusted.

o Do not adjust the headrest height whilethe vehicle is in motion.

B080D01JM

B080D01NF

Lock knob


16

B083D01NF-AAT

Active Headrests (If Installed)

The active headrest is designed to move for-ward and upward during a rear impact. Thishelps to prevent the driver's and frontpassenger's head from moving backward andthus helps prevent neck injuries.

B081D01LZ-AAT

Tilting Headrest Forward and Rearward

The headrest may be tilted forward to threedifferent positions by pulling the headrest for-ward. To adjust the headrest rearward, pull itfully forward to the farthest position and releaseit. Adjust the headrest so that it properly sup-ports the head and neck.

B081D01NF HNF2041-1

B080E01Y-AAT

Lumbar Support Control(Driver's Seat Only) (If Installed)

To adjust the lumbar support, turn the handle onthe outboard or left side of the seat. To increasethe amount of lumbar support, pull the leverforward. To decrease it, push the lever towardthe rear.

1. Minimum support2. Maximum support

HNF2039

1

2


17

!

B090A01Y-AAT

POWER DRIVER'S SEAT (If Installed)

The driver's seat can be adjusted by using thecontrol knobs on the left side of the seat. Beforedriving, adjust the seat to the proper position soas to easily control the steering wheel, pedalsand switches on the instrument panel.

CAUTION:Do not operate two knobs at the same time.

WARNING:o Never attempt to adjust the seat while

the vehicle is moving. This could resultin loss of control or an accident causingdeath, serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close tothe airbag.

!

B080F01NF-GAT

Seat Height Adjustment(Driver's Seat Only)

To raise or lower the seat, raise or lower thecontrol lever to the desired seat height.

HNF2034

B090B01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seat Forward and Rearward

Pull the control knob forward or backward tomove the seat forward or backward to thedesired position. Release the control knob andthe seat will remain at that position.

HNF2036


18

! WARNING:To minimize the risk of personal injury inthe event of a collision or a sudden stop,both the driver's and passenger's seatbackshould remain in an upright position whilethe car is in motion. The protection pro-vided by the seat belts and airbags may bereduced significantly when the seatbacksare reclined. There is a greater risk that theseat occupants will slide under the beltresulting in serious injury if a crash occurswhen the seatbacks are reclined. The seatbelt cannot provide full protection to anoccupant if the seatback is reclined.

B090D01NF-GAT

Adjusting Seatback Angle

Pull the upper portion of the control knob forwardor backward to recline the seatback to thedesired position. Release the control knob andthe seatback will remain in that position.

B090C01Y-AAT

Seat Cushion Height Adjustment

Move the front portion of the control knob up ordown to raise or lower the front part of the seatcushion. Move the rear portion of the controlknob up or down to raise or lower the rear partof the seat cushion.

HNF2038 HNF2037


19

!B100A01NF-AAT

SEAT WARMER (If Installed)

The seat warmer is provided to warm the frontseats during cold weather. With the ignition keyin the "ON" position, push either of the switchesto warm the driver's seat or the front passenger'sseat.During mild weather or under conditions wherethe operation of the seat warmer is not needed,keep the switches in the "OFF" position.

NOTE:o The seat warmer may not operate if the

ambient temperature is warm.o If the seat warmer doesn't operate when

the ambient temperature is lower than75.2°F (24°C), it must be checked at anauthorized dealer.

B100A01NF

WARNING:Do not turn on the seat warmers, if the seatis occupied by someone who cannot moni-tor the temperature and turn off the seatwarmer, if it becomes too warm. The seatwarmers should not be turned on whenchildren, the elderly, ill people, and sleep-ing people occupy the seat.

B110A01NF-GAT

FOLDING REAR SEATBACKS

o To unlock the seatback, pull the seatbackrelease lever, then pull forward on theseatback panel.

o When you return the seatback to its uprightposition, always be sure it has locked intoposition by pulling and pushing on the top ofthe seatback.

B110A01NF-A


20

!B140A01S-AAT

REAR SEAT WARNING

For the safety of all passengers, luggage orother cargo should not be piled higher than thetop of the seatback. In addition, do not placeobjects on the rear shelf as they may moveforward during braking or in an accident andmay strike and injure vehicle passengers.

B140A01NF-A

! WARNING:The purpose of the folding rear seatbacksis to allow you to carry longer objects thancould otherwise be accommodated. Do notallow passengers to sit on top of the foldeddown seatback, while the car is moving asthis is not a proper seating position and noseat belts are available for use. This couldresult in serious injury or death in case of anaccident or sudden stop. Objects carriedon the folded down seatback should notextend higher than the top of the frontseats. This could allow cargo to slide for-ward and cause injury or damage duringsudden stops.

B120A01NF-GAT

REAR SEATBACK SAFETY LOCK

If the rear seatback lock knob (located on thebackside of the rear seatback) is in the "LOCK"position when the rear seatbacks are uprightand closed, it will not be possible to fold the rearseatback by using the seatback release lever.In this instance, move the lock knob to the"UNLOCK" position and fold the rear seatback.The rear seatback lock knob is designed toprovide protection from unauthorized entry intothe trunk.

B120A01NF-A


21SEAT BELTS

B150B03Y-AAT

Infant or Small Child

All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.Information about the use of these restraintsbegins on page 1-28.

!

B150A01S-AAT

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

WARNING:All occupants of the vehicle must wear theirseat belts at all times. Note that this vehicleis equipped with a Supplemental Restraint(Airbag) System as discussed beginningon page 1-36. The seat belts must be usedin conjunction with the supplementalairbag system. State laws require that someor all occupants of the vehicle use seatbelts. The possibility of increased injury orseverity of injury in an accident will beincreased if this elementary safety precau-tion is not observed. In addition, follow theother instructions provided in this section.

! WARNING:Every person in your vehicle needs to beproperly restrained at all times, includinginfants and children. In a collision, an unre-strained child can become a "missile" in-side the car. The force required to hold achild on your lap could be so great that youcould not hold the child. Any child riding inthe vehicle should always be in a properrestraint in the rear seat of the vehicle.

NOTE:Small children are best protected from in-jury in an accident when properly restrainedin the rear seat by a child restraint systemthat meets the requirements of the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards. Beforebuying any child restraint system, makesure that it has a label certifying that itmeets Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-dard 213. The restraint must be appropriatefor your child's height and weight. Checkthe label on the child restraint for thisinformation. See page 1-28.

B150C02A-AAT

Larger Children

Children who are too large for child restraintsystems should always occupy the rear seatand use the available lap/shoulder belts. The lapportion should be fastened snug on the hips andas low as possible. Check belt fit periodically. Achild's squirming could put the belt out of posi-tion. Children are afforded the most safety in theevent of an accident when they are restrainedby a proper restraint system in the rear seat. Ifa larger child (over age 13) must be seated inthe front seat, the child should be securelyrestrained by the available lap/shoulder belt andthe seat should be placed in the rearmostposition. Children under the age of 13 should berestrained securely in the rear seat. NEVERplace a child under the age of 13 in the front seat.NEVER place a rear facing child seat in the frontseat of a vehicle.

B150D01A-AAT

Pregnant Women

The use of a seat belt is recommended forpregnant women to lessen the chance of injuryin an accident. When a seat belt is used, the lapbelt portion should be placed as low and snuglyas possible on the hips, not across the abdo-men. For specific recommendations, consult aphysician.


22

!

B160A01A-AAT

CARE OF SEAT BELTS

Seat belt systems should never be disassembledor modified. In addition, care should be taken toassure that seat belts and belt hardware are notdamaged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse.

WARNING:When you return the rear seatback to itsupright position after the rear seatback wasfolded down, be careful not to damage theseat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure thatthe webbing or buckle does not get caughtor pinched in the rear seat.

B160B01A-AAT

Periodic Inspection

It is recommended that all seat belts be in-spected periodically for wear or damage of anykind. Parts of the system that are damagedshould be replaced as soon as possible.

WARNING:Sitting in a reclined position or lying downwhen your vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even if you buckle up, your seatbelts can't do their job when you're re-clined.The shoulder belt can't do its job becauseit won't be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In a crash,you could go into it with great force, receiv-ing serious neck or other injuries.The lap belt can't do its job either. In a crash,the belt could go up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be applied there, notat your strong pelvic bones.This could cause serious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle is inmotion, have the seatback upright.Then sit back in the seat and wear your seatbelt properly. See page 1-24.

!B150E01A-AAT

Injured Person

A seat belt should be used when an injuredperson is being transported. When this is nec-essary, you should consult a physician forrecommendations.

B150F01A-AAT

One Person Per Belt

Two people (including children) should neverattempt to use a single seat belt. This couldincrease the severity of injuries in case of anaccident.

B150G01A-AAT

Do Not Lie Down

To reduce the chance of injuries in the event ofan accident and to achieve maximum effective-ness of the restraint system, all passengersshould be sitting up and the front seats shouldbe in an upright position when the car is moving.A seat belt cannot provide proper protection ifthe person is lying down in the rear seat or if thefront seat is in a reclined position.


23

B160C01A-AAT

Keep Belts Clean and Dry

Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If beltsbecome dirty, they can be cleaned by using amild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye,strong detergents or abrasives should not beused because they may damage and weakenthe fabric.

B160D01A-AAT

When to Replace Seat Belts

Entire in-use seat belt assembly or assembliesshould be replaced if the vehicle has beeninvolved in an accident. This should be doneeven if no damage is visible. Additional ques-tions concerning seat belt operation should bedirected to your Hyundai Dealer.

B170A01NF-GAT

HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE FRONT SEATSHOULDER BELT

You can adjust the height of the shoulder beltanchor to one of 3 positions for maximumcomfort and safety.If the height of the adjusting seat belt is too nearyour neck, you will not be getting the mosteffective protection. The shoulder portion shouldbe adjusted so that it lies across your chest andmidway over your shoulder nearest the doorand not your neck.To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor,lower or raise the height adjuster into an appro-priate position.To raise the height adjuster, pull it up. To lowerit, push it down while pressing the height ad-juster button.

HNF2049

!

Release the button to lock the anchor intoposition. Try sliding the height adjuster to makesure that it has locked into position.

WARNING:o The height adjuster must be in the locked

position when the vehicle is moving.o The misadjustment of height of the

shoulder belt could reduce the effective-ness of the seat belt in a crash.


24

B190A01NF-AAT

SEAT BELTS-Front Passenger and RearSeat 3-Point System with CombinationLocking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

Combination retractor type seat belts are in-stalled in the rear seat positions to help accom-modate the installation of child restraint systems.Although a combination retractor is also installedin the front passenger seat position, Hyundaistrongly recommends that children always beseated in the rear seat. NEVER place any infantrestraint system in the front seat of the vehicle.This type of seat belt combines the features ofboth an emergency locking retractor seat beltand an automatic locking retractor seat belt. Tofasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle. When not securing a child restraint,the seat belt operates in the same way as thedriver's seat belt (Emergency Locking Retrac-tor Type). It automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion of the seatbelt is adjusted manually so that it fits snuglyaround your hips. When the seat belt is fullyextended from the retractor to allow the instal-lation of a child restraint system, the seat beltoperation changes to allow the belt to retract, butnot to extend (Automatic Locking RetractorType). See page 1-32.

B180A01NF-AAT

SEAT BELT-Driver's 3-Point System withEmergency Locking RetractorTo Fasten Your Belt

To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractorand insert the metal tab into the buckle. Therewill be an audible "click" when the tab locks intothe buckle.The seat belt automatically adjusts to the properlength only after the lap belt portion is adjustedmanually so that it fits snugly around your hips.If you lean forward in a slow, easy motion, thebelt will extend and let you move around. If thereis a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt willlock into position. It will also lock if you try to leanforward too quickly.

B180A01NF

NOTE:If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe ignition key is turned from the "OFF"position to the "ON" or "START" position,the seat belt warning light will blink and thewarning chime will sound for approximatelysix seconds to remind the driver to fastenthe driver's seat belt.


25

NOTE:o Although the combination retractor pro-

vides the same level of protection forseated passengers in either emergencyor automatic locking modes, it is recom-mended that seated passengers use theemergency locking feature for improvedconvenience. The automatic lockingfunction is intended to facilitate childrestraint installation. To convert fromthe automatic locking feature to theemergency locking operation mode, al-low the unbuckled seat belt to fully re-tract.

o The front passenger's seat belt warninglight on the center fascia panel blinksuntil the front passenger's seat belt isfastened to remind the front passengerto fasten the front passenger's seat belt,when the ignition key is turned from the"OFF" position to "the "ON" or "START"position.

WARNING:o For maximum restraint system protec-

tion, the seat belts must always be usedwhenever the car is moving.

o Seat belts are most effective whenseatbacks are in the upright position.

o Children must always be seatbelted inthe rear seats. Never allow children toride in the front passenger seat.

o The shoulder belt should be positionedmidway over the shoulder nearest thedoor for the most effective protection.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door. Wearing the belt underthe arm nearest the door could causeserious or fatal injuries in an accident.

o Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. Atwisted belt can't do its job as well. In acollision, it could even cut into you. Besure the belt webbing is straight and nottwisted.

o Be careful not to damage the belt web-bing or hardware. If the belt webbing orhardware is damaged, replace it.

!

WARNING:You should place the lap belt portion as lowas possible and snugly across your hips,not on your waist. If the lap belt is locatedtoo high on your waist, it may increase thechance of injury in the event of a collision.Both arms should not be under or over thebelt. Rather, one should be over and theother under, as shown in the illustration.Never wear the seat belt under the armnearest the door.

!

B200A01A-AAT

Adjusting Your Seat Belt

B200A01NF


26

3. After confirming that (a) and (b) are latched,pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insertthe metal tab (c) into the buckle (d).

B220A02NF-A

B200A01NF-AAT

SEAT BELTS - Rear Seat Center 3-PointSystem With Combination Locking Re-tractor

1. Pull the seat belt out of the rear seat packagetray.

2. Before fastening the rear seat center belt,confirm the metal tab (a) and buckle (b) arelatched together.

B220A01NF-A

The seat belt is released by pressing the re-lease button in the locking buckle. When it isreleased, the belt should automatically drawback into the retractor.If this does not happen, check the belt to be sureit is not twisted, then try again.

B210A01A-AAT

To Release the Seat Belt

B210A01NF


27

There will be an audible "click" when the tablocks in the buckle. The seat belt automaticallyadjusts to the proper length only after the lap beltis adjusted manually so that it fits snugly aroundyour hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easymotion, the belt will extend and let you movearound. If there is a sudden stop or impact, thebelt will lock into position. It will also lock if youtry to lean forward too quickly.

! WARNING:o When using the rear seat center belt, you

must lock all metal tabs and buckles. Ifany metal tab or buckle is not locked, itwill increase the chance of injury in theevent of collision.

o Never unlock the metal tab (a) and thebuckle (b) with the following excep-tions.(1) In case of folding rear seatbacks

down.(2) If transporting an object on the rear

seat may cause damage to the rearseat center belt.

B180A01NF-E

!o Lock the metal tab (a) and the buckle (b)

immediately after folding rear seatbacksup.

B220A03NF-A

WARNING:

o To disconnect the metal tab (a) from thebuckle (b), insert a narrow-ended toolinto the groove located on the buckle(b).


28

! WARNING:o A child restraint system must be placed

in the rear seat. Never install a child orinfant seat on the front passenger's seat.Should an accident occur and cause thepassenger side airbag to deploy, it couldseverely injure or kill an infant or childseated in an infant or child seat. Thusonly use a child restraint in the rear seatof your vehicle.

o A safety belt or child restraint systemcan become very hot if it is left in a closedvehicle on a sunny day, even if the out-side temperature does not feel hot. Besure to check the seat cover and bucklesbefore placing a child there.

o When the child restraint system is not inuse, store it in the trunk or fasten it witha safety belt so that it will not be thrownforward in the case of a sudden stop oran accident.

o Children who are too large to be in a childrestraint should sit in the rear seat and berestrained with the available lap/shoul-der belts. Never allow children to ride inthe front passenger seat.

B220C02A-GAT

To Release the Seat Belt

When you want to release the seat belt, pressthe button in the locking buckle.

! WARNING:When fastening the outboard seat belts orthe center seat belt, make sure they areinserted into the correct buckles to obtainmaximum protection from the seat beltsystem and assure proper operation.

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

B230A03Y-AAT

Children riding in the car should sit in the rearseat and must always be properly restrained tominimize the risk of injury in an accident, suddenstop or sudden maneuver. According to acci-dent statistics provided by the National High-way Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),children are safer when properly restrained inthe rear seats than in the front seat. Largerchildren not in a child restraint should use oneof the seat belts provided.All 50 states have child restraint laws. Youshould be aware of the specific requirements inyour state. Child and/or infant safety seats mustbe properly placed and installed in the rear seat.You must use a commercially available childrestraint system that meets the requirements ofthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(FMVSS).Children could be injured or killed in a crash iftheir restraints are not properly secured. Forsmall children and babies, a child seat or infantseat must be used. Before buying a particularchild restraint system, make sure it fits your carseat and seat belts, and fits your child. Followall the instructions provided by the manufac-turer when installing the child restraint system.

B220C02NF-A


29

!WARNING:o Always make sure that the shoulder belt

portion of the lap/shoulder belt is posi-tioned midway over the shoulder andnever across the neck or behind theback. Moving the child closer toward theseat belt buckle may help provide a goodshoulder belt fit. The lap belt portion ofthe lap/shoulder belt must always bepositioned as low as possible on thechild's hips, and as snug as possible.

o If the seat belt will not properly fit thechild, Hyundai recommends the use ofan approved booster seat in the rear seatin order to raise the child's seating heightso that the seat belt will properly fit thechild.Before purchasing a booster seat, makesure that it meets applicable FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)and that it is satisfactory for use with thisvehicle.

o Never allow a child to stand up or kneelon the seat.

o Never use an infant carrier or a childsafety seat that "hooks" over a seatback;it may not provide adequate security inan accident.

WARNING:o Never allow a child to be held in a person's

arms while they are in a moving vehicle,as this could result in serious injury tothe child in the event of an accident or asudden stop. Holding a child in a movingvehicle does not provide the child withany means of protection during an acci-dent, even if the person holding the childis wearing a seat belt.

!B230B01NF-AAT

Using a Child Restraint System

For small children and babies, the use of a childseat or infant seat is required. This child seat orinfant seat should be of appropriate size for thechild and should be installed in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. It is furtherrequired that the seat be placed in the vehicle'srear seat. Your vehicle is provided with threechild restraint hook holders for installing thechild seat or infant seat.


30

!

For vehicles with adjustable headrests, routethe tether strap under the headrest andbetween the headrest posts, otherwise routethe tether strap over the top of the seatback.

3. Connect the tether strap hook to the childrestraint hook holder and tighten to securethe seat.

WARNING:Do not mount more than one child restraintto a single tether or to a child restraint loweranchorage point. The improper increasedload may cause the anchorage points ortether anchor to break, causing seriousinjury or death.

2. Route the child restraint seat tether strapover the seatback.

B230C02NF

Rear seat package tray

Tether Strap Hook

Child Restraint Hook Holders

B230C04A-AAT

Installing a Child Restraint Seat with the"Tether Anchorage" System

Three child restraint hook holders are locatedon the rear seat package tray.

To install the child restraint seat

1. Open the tether anchor cover on the rearseat package tray.

B230C01NF

Tether Anchor Cover Child RestraintHook Holder

Front of Vehicle


31

B230D03E-AAT

Securing the Child Restraint Seat withthe "ISOFIX" system

Some child seat manufacturers make safetyseats that are labeled as ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatible child seats. These seats include tworigid or webbing mounted attachments thatconnect to two ISOFIX anchors at specificseating positions in your vehicle. This type ofchild seat eliminates the need to use seat beltsto attach the child seat for forward-facing childseats.ISOFIX anchors have been provided in yourvehicle. The ISOFIX anchors are located in theleft and right outboard rear seating positions.Their locations are shown in the illustration.There is no ISOFIX anchor provided for thecenter rear seating position.

B230D01NF

The ISOFIX anchors are located between theseatback and the seat cushion of the rear seatleft and right outboard seating positions.

! WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint seat at the

center of the rear seat using the vehicle'sISOFIX anchors. The ISOFIX anchors areonly provided for the left and right out-board rear seating positions. Do notmisuse the ISOFIX anchors by attempt-ing to attach a child safety seat in themiddle of the rear seat position to theISOFIX anchors. In a crash, the child seatISOFIX attachments may not be strongenough to secure the child restraint seatproperly in the center of the rear seat andmay break, causing serious injury ordeath.

o Do not mount more than one child re-straint to a single tether or to a childrestraint lower anchorage point. Theimproper increased load may cause theanchorage points or tether anchor tobreak, causing serious injury or death.

o Attach the ISOFIX or ISOFIX-compatiblechild seat only to the appropriate loca-tions shown.

o Always follow the installation and useinstructions provided by the manufac-turer of the child restraint.

B230D02NF-A

ISOFIX Anchor

ISOFIX AnchorPosition Indicator

B230D03NF-A


32

B230G03Y-AAT

Installation on Rear SeatsTo install a child restraint system in the rearseats, extend the shoulder/lap belt entirely fromits retractor until a "click" is felt. This will engagethe seat belt retractor automatic locking feature,which allows the seat belt to retract but notextend. Install the child restraint system, bucklethe seat belt and allow the seat belt to take upany slack. Make sure that the lap portion of thebelt is tight around the child restraint system andthe shoulder portion of the belt is positioned sothat it cannot interfere with the child's head orneck. Also, double check to be sure that theretractor has engaged the Automatic Lockingfeature by trying to extend webbing out of theretractor. If the retractor is in the AutomaticLocking mode, the belt will be locked. Afterinstallation of the child restraint system, try tomove it in all directions to be sure the childrestraint system is securely installed. If you needto tighten the belt, pull more webbing toward theretractor. When you unbuckle the seat belt andallow it to retract, the retractor will automaticallyrevert back to its normal seated passengerEmergency Locking usage condition.

B230G01NF-A

On outboard rear seats

! WARNING:If the child restraint seat is not anchoredproperly, the risk of a child being seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision greatly in-creases.

Follow the child seat manufacturer's instruc-tions to properly install safety seats with ISOFIXor ISOFIX-compatible attachments.

Once you have installed the ISOFIX child re-straint seat, assure that the seat is properlyattached to the ISOFIX and tether anchors.Also, test the safety seat before you place thechild in it. Tilt the seat from side to side. Also tryto tug the seat forward. Check to see if theanchors hold the seat in place.

B235G02NF-A

On rear seat center position


33

! WARNING:o If the retractor is not in the Automatic

Locking mode, the child restraint sys-tem can move when your vehicle turns orstops abruptly.

o Do not install any child restraint systemin the front passenger seat. Should anaccident occur and cause the passengerside airbag to deploy, it could severelyinjure or kill an infant or child seated inan infant or child seat. Therefore, onlyuse a child restraint system in the rearseat of your vehicle.

NOTE:o Before installing the child restraint sys-

tem in any seating position, read theinstructions supplied by the child re-straint system manufacturer.

o If the seat belt does not operate as de-scribed, have the system checked imme-diately by your authorized Hyundai dealer.

!

B180B01NF-AAT

Pre-tensioner Seat Belt

Your Hyundai vehicle is equipped with driver'sand front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts.The purpose of the pre-tensioner is to makesure that the seat belts fit tightly against theoccupant's body in certain frontal collisions.The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision is severeenough, together with the airbags.

When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if theoccupant tries to lean forward too quickly, theseat belt retractor will lock into position. Incertain frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner willactivate and pull the seat belt into tighter contactagainst the occupant's body. The buckle pre-

HXG229

CAUTION:Do not put anything near the buckle. Plac-ing objects near the buckle can adverselyaffect the buckle pre-tensioner and mayincrease the risk of personal injury in theevent of a collision.

If the system senses excessive seat belt ten-sion on the driver or passenger's seat belt whenthe pre-tensioner activates, the load limiterinside the pre-tensioner will release some of thepressure on the affected seat belt.

The seat belt pre-tensioner system consistsmainly of the following components. Their loca-tions are shown in the illustration:

tensioner (which is installed in the buckle) willalso pull the seat belt into the buckle.


34

!

!

AIRBAG

1. SRS airbag warning light2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly3. SRS control module4. Buckle pre-tensioner assembly

B180B01NF

1

23

Driver's airbag

Passenger'sairbag

WARNING:To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt:

1. The seat belt must be worn correctly.2. The seat belt must be adjusted to the

correct position.3. Be sure you and your passengers always

wear seat belts and wear them properly.

NOTE:o Both the driver's and front passenger's

pre-tensioner seat belts will be activatedin certain frontal collisions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activatedalone or, where the frontal collision issevere enough, together with theairbags.The pre-tensioners will not be activatedif the seat belts are not being worn at thetime of the collision.

o When the pre-tensioner seat belts areactivated, a loud noise may be heard andfine dust, which may appear to be smoke,may be visible in the passenger com-partment. These are normal operatingconditions and are not hazardous.

o Although it is harmless, the fine dustmay cause skin irritation and should notbe breathed for prolonged periods. Washall exposed skin areas thoroughly afteran accident in which the pre-tensionerseat belts were activated.

CAUTION:o Because the sensor that activates the

SRS airbag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS airbag warn-ing light on the instrument panel willilluminate for approximately 6 secondsafter the ignition key has been turned tothe "ON" position, and then it shouldturn off.

o If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not work-ing properly, this warning light will illu-minate even if there is no malfunction ofthe SRS airbag. If the SRS airbag warninglight does not illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to "ON", or if it blinksfor a second and remains illuminatedafter illuminating for approximately 6seconds, or if it illuminates while thevehicle is being driven, please have anauthorized Hyundai dealer inspect thepre-tensioner seat belt or SRS airbagsystem as soon as possible.

4


35

! WARNING:o Pre-tensioners are designed to operate

only one time. After activation, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced.All seat belts, of any type, should alwaysbe replaced after they have been wornduring a collision.

o The pre-tensioner seat belt assemblymechanisms become hot during activa-tion. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seatbelt assemblies for several minutes afterthey have been activated.

o Do not attempt to inspect or replace thepre-tensioner seat belts yourself. Thismust be done by an authorized Hyundaidealer.

o Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat beltassemblies.

o Do not attempt to service or repair thepre-tensioner seat belt system in anymanner.

o Improper handling of the pre-tensionerseat belt assemblies, and failure to heedthe warnings not to strike, modify, in-spect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may leadto improper operation or inadvertentactivation and serious injury.

o Always wear the seat belts when drivingor riding in a motor vehicle.


36

B240D01NF-AAT

ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT (AIRBAG) SYSTEM (SRS)

1. Driver's front airbag2. Passenger's front airbag3. Side impact airbag4. Curtain airbag

HNF2052


37

B240A01NF

The SRS uses sensors to gather informationabout the driver's and front passenger's seatposition, the driver's and front passenger's seatbelt usage and impact severity.

The driver's and front passenger's seat trackposition sensors, which are installed on the seattrack, determine if the seats are fore or aft of areference position. The seat belt buckle sen-sors determine if the driver and front passenger'sseat belts are fastened. These sensors providethe ability to control the SRS deployment basedon how close the driver's seat is to the steeringwheel, how close the passenger's seat is to theinstrument panel, whether or not the seat beltsare fastened, and how severe the impact is.

The advanced SRS offers the ability to controlthe airbag inflation with two levels. A first stagelevel is provided for moderate-severity impacts.A second stage level is provided for moresevere impacts.

According to the impact severity, seating posi-tion and seat belt usage, the SRSCM(SRSControl Module) controls the airbag inflation.Failure to properly wear seat belts can increasethe risk or severity of injury in an accident.

CAUTION:If a seat track position sensor or an occu-pant classification system is not workingproperly, the SRS airbag warning light onthe instrument panel will illuminate be-cause the SRS airbag warning light is con-nected with the seat track position sensorand the occupant classification system. Ifthe SRS airbag warning light does not illu-minate when the ignition key is turned tothe "ON" position, remains illuminated af-ter approximately 6 seconds when the igni-tion key is turned to the "ON" position, orif it illuminates while the vehicle is beingdriven, have an authorized Hyundai dealerinspect the advanced SRS airbag system assoon as possible.

!AIRBAG

Additionally, your Hyundai is equipped with anoccupant classification system in the frontpassenger's seat. The occupant classificationsystem detects the presence of a passenger inthe front passenger's seat and will turn off thefront passenger's airbag under certain condi-tions. For more detail, see "Occupant Classifi-cation System" later in this section.

B240A01NF-AAT

Driver's and Passenger's Front Airbag

Your Hyundai is equipped with an advancedSupplemental Restraint (Airbag) System. Theindications of the system's presence are theletters "SRS AIRBAG" embossed on the airbagpad cover in the steering wheel and thepassenger's side front panel pad above theglove box.

The Hyundai SRS consists of airbags installedunder the pad covers in the center of thesteering wheel and the passenger's side frontpanel above the glove box. The purpose of theSRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or thefront passenger with additional protection thanthat offered by the seat belt system alone incase of a frontal impact of sufficient severity.

Driver's Front Airbag


38

B240A02NF

Rear impact

Side Impact

Rollover

!

o The driver should sit back as far aspossible while still maintaining controlof the vehicle. If you are sitting too closeto the airbag, it can cause death or seri-ous injury when it inflates.

WARNING:o Front airbags are not intended to deploy

in side-impact, rear-impact or rollovercrashes. In addition, front airbags willnot deploy in frontal crashes below thedeployment threshold.

! WARNING:o As its name implies, the SRS is designed

to work with, and be supplemental to thedriver's and the passenger's three pointseat belt systems and is not a substitutefor them. Therefore, your seat belts mustbe worn at all times. The airbags deployonly in certain frontal impact conditionssevere enough to cause significant in-jury to the vehicle occupants.

o Sitting too close to a front airbag canresult in serious or fatal injury if the frontairbags inflate. Always sit as far backfrom airbags as possible.

o Ignoring the SRS airbag warning lightcan result in serious or fatal injury if theairbags, occupant classification systemor pre-tensioners do not work properly.Have your car checked by a dealer as soonas possible if the SRS airbag warninglight alerts you to a potential problem.

o The SRS is designed to deploy the frontairbags only when an impact is suffi-ciently severe and when the impact angleis less than 30° from the forward longi-tudinal axis of the vehicle. The frontairbags will not deploy in side, rear orrollover impacts. Additionally, theairbags will only deploy once. Seat beltsmust be worn at all times.

! WARNING:o Modification to the seat structure can

adversely affect the seat track positionsensor and cause the airbag to deploy ata different level than should be pro-vided.

o Do not place any objects underneath thefront seats as they could damage theseat track position sensor or interferewith the occupant classification sys-tem.

o Do not place any objects that may causemagnetic fields near the front seat. Thesemay cause a malfunction of the seattrack position sensor.

NOTE:o Be sure to read information about the

SRS on the labels provided on the back-side of the sun visor and in the glove box.

o Advanced airbags are combined withpre-tensioner seat belts to help provideenhanced occupant protection in fron-tal crashes. Front airbags are not in-tended to deploy in collisions in whichsufficient protection can be provided bythe pre-tensioner seat belt.

o If you are considering modification ofyour vehicle due to a disability, pleasecontact the Hyundai Customer Assis-tance Center at 1-800-633-5151.


39

! WARNING:o No objects should be placed over or near

the airbag modules on the steeringwheel, instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to deploy.

o If the airbags deploy, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental deployment of theairbags or by rendering the SRS inopera-tive.

o Even though your vehicle is equippedwith the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured or killedby an airbag deployment in case of anaccident.

o Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. If older children (teen-agers and older) must ride in the frontseat, make sure they are always properlybelted and the seat is moved back as faras possible.

o For maximum safety protection in alltypes of crashes, all occupants includ-ing the driver should always wear theirseat belts whether or not an airbag isalso provided at their seating position tominimize the risk of severe injury ordeath in the event of a crash. Do not sitor lean unnecessarily close to the airbagwhile the vehicle is in motion.

o Sitting improperly or out of position canresult in serious or fatal injury in a crash.All occupants should sit upright withthe seat back in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor until the ve-hicle is parked and the ignition key isremoved.

o The SRS airbag system must deploy veryrapidly to provide protection in a crash.If an occupant is out of position becauseof not wearing a seat belt, the airbag mayforcefully contact the occupant causingserious or fatal injuries.

! WARNING:

B240B01NF-AAT

SRS Components and Functions

The SRS consists of the following components:

1. Front Impact Sensor2. "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" Indicator

(Front passenger's seat only)3. SRS "AIRBAG" warning light4. Knee Bolster5. Passenger's Airbag Module6. Driver's Airbag Module7. SRS Control Module (SRSCM)8. Occupant Classification System

(Front passenger's seat only)9. Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Track

Position Sensors10.Driver's and Front Passenger's Seat Belt

Buckle Sensors/Buckle Pre-tensioner As-semblies

B240B01NF


40

B240B02L

Upon deployment, tear seams molded directlyinto the pad covers will separate under pres-sure from the expansion of the airbags. Furtheropening of the covers then allows full inflation ofthe airbags.

A fully inflated airbag, in combination with aproperly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or thepassenger's forward motion, reducing the riskof head and chest injury.

After complete inflation, the airbag immediatelystarts deflating, enabling the driver to maintainforward visibility and the ability to steer oroperate other controls.

B240B03L

11.Side Impact Sensor12.Retractor Pre-tensioner Assemblies13.Side Impact Airbag Module14.Curtain Airbag Module

The SRSCM continually monitors all elementswhile the ignition is "ON" to determine if a frontalor near-frontal impact is severe enough torequire airbag deployment or pre-tensioner seatbelt deployment.

The SRS "AIRBAG" warning light on the instru-ment panel will illuminate for about 6 secondsafter the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position or after the engine is started, after whichthe "AIRBAG" warning light should go out.

The airbag modules are located both in thecenter of the steering wheel and in the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box. Whenthe SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impactto the front of the vehicle, it will automaticallydeploy the front airbags.

B240B01L


41

!

Passenger's Front Airbag

B240B05L

!o The SRS can function only when the

ignition key is in the "ON" position. If theSRS "AIRBAG" warning light does notilluminate, or continuously remains onafter illuminating for about 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the"ON" position, or after the engine isstarted, comes on while driving, the SRSis not working properly. If this occurs,have your vehicle immediately inspect-ed by your Hyundai dealer.

o Before you replace a fuse or disconnecta battery terminal, turn the ignition keyto the "LOCK" position and remove theignition key. Never remove or replace theairbag related fuse(s) when the ignitionkey is in the "ON" position. Failure toheed this warning will cause the SRS"AIRBAG" warning light to illuminate.

Passenger's Front Airbag

CAUTION:o Do not install or place any accessories

(drink holder, cassette holder, sticker,etc.) on the front passenger's panelabove the glove box in a vehicle with apassenger's airbag. Such objects maybecome dangerous projectiles and causeinjury if the passenger's airbag inflates.

o When installing a container of liquid airfreshener inside the vehicle, do not placeit near the instrument cluster nor on theinstrument panel surface. If there is anyleakage from the air freshener onto theseareas (instrument cluster, instrument

!

B240B04NF

panel or air ventilator), it may damagethese parts. If the liquid from the airfreshener does leak onto these areas,wash them with water immediately.

WARNING:o When the SRS is activated, there may be

a loud noise and fine dust will be re-leased throughout the vehicle. Theseconditions are normal and are not haz-ardous. However, the fine dust generat-ed during airbag deployment may causeskin irritation. Wash all exposed skinareas thoroughly with lukewarm waterand a mild soap after an accident inwhich the airbags were deployed.

WARNING:

NOTE:Your vehicle's Supplemental Restraint Sys-tem Control Module is equipped a record-ing device which may record the use of theseat belt restraint system by the driver andfront passenger in certain collisions.


42

!

legs comfortably extended and their feet on thefloor), the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator will be turned off and the front passenger'sairbag will be able to inflate, if necessary, infrontal crashes.You will find the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF"indicator on the center facia panel. This systemdetects the conditions 1~4 in the following tableand activates or deactivates front passengerairbags based on these conditions.

Condition and operation in the front pas-senger occupant classification system

*1)The system judges a person of adult size asan adult. When a smaller adult sits in the frontpassenger seat, the system may recognizehim/her as a child depending on his/herphysique and posture.

*2) Do not allow children to ride in the frontpassenger seat. When a larger child whohas outgrown a child restraint system sits inthe front passenger seat, the system mayrecognize him/her as an adult depending onhis/her physique or posture.

*3)Never install a child restraint system on thefront passenger seat.

Frontpassenger

airbag

Activated

Deactivated

Deactivated

Activated

Conditiondetected bythe occupantclassification

system1. Adult*1

2. Child*2 orchild restraintsystem*3

3. Unoccupied4. There is a

malfunctionin thesystem

SRSwarning

light

Off

Off

Off

On

"Passengerair bag off"

indicator light

Off

On

On

Off

B990A01NF-AAT

OCCUPANT CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an occupantclassification system in the front passenger'sseat.The Occupant Classification system is de-signed to detect the presence of a properly-seated front passenger and determine if thepassenger's front airbag should be enabled(may inflate) or not. The driver's front airbag isnot affected or controlled by the OccupantClassification system.

If the front passenger seat is occupied by aperson that the system determines to be of adultsize, and he/she sits properly (sitting uprightwith the seatback in an upright position, cen-tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on,

B990A02NF-A

WARNING:Do not do any of the following. Placingweight on the front passenger's seat orsitting out-of-correct position adverselyaffects occupant classification systemoperation.


43

- Lean on the center console.- Sit on one side of the front passenger seat.

B990A07O

B990A05O

- Place feet on the dashboard.o Excessively recline the front passenger

seatback.

o Sit with hips shifted towards the front of theseat.

B990A03O

B990A02O

o Put a heavy load in the front passenger seat.

B990A08O


44

!

NOTE:The "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorilluminates for about 6 seconds after theignition key is turned to the "ON" positionor after the engine is started. If the frontpassenger seat is occupied, the occupantclassification sensor will then classify thefront passenger within approximately 10seconds after the ignition is turned on.

CAUTION:If the occupant classification system is notworking properly, the SRS airbag warninglight on the instrument panel willilluminate because the passenger's frontairbags are connected with the occupantclassification system. If there is a malfunc-tion of the occupant classification system,the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorwill not illuminate and the passenger's frontairbags will inflate in frontal impact crasheseven if there is no occupant in the frontpassenger's seat. If the SRS airbag warninglight does not illuminate when the ignitionkey is turned to the "ON" position, remainsilluminated after approximately 6 secondswhen the ignition key is turned to the "ON"position, or if it illuminates while the vehicleis being driven, have an authorized Hyundaidealer inspect the occupant classificationsystem and the SRS airbag system as soonas possible.

! WARNING:o Even though your vehicle is equipped

with the occupant classification sys-tem, do not install a child restraint sys-tem in the front passenger's seat. A childrestraint system must never be placed inthe front seat. Children who are too largefor child restraint systems should al-ways occupy the rear seat and use theavailable lap/shoulder belts. Children areafforded the most safety in the event ofan accident when they are restrained bya proper restraint system in the rear seat.

o If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indi-cator is illuminated when the frontpassenger's seat is occupied by an adultand he/she sits properly (sitting uprightwith the seatback in an upright position,centered on the seat cushion with theirseat belt on, legs comfortably extendedand their feet on the floor), have thatperson sit in the rear seat.

o If you change the weight on the frontpassenger seat just after sit-in or restartof the engine, the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator may be turned on oroff for a few seconds, disabling or en-abling the passenger airbags. After theinitial stage of about 30 seconds, the"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicatorwill not toggle.

When an adult is seated in the front passengerseat, if the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indica-tor is on, turn the ignition key to "LOCK" and askthe passenger to sit properly (sitting upright withthe seat back in an upright position, centered onthe seat cushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet on thefloor). Restart the engine and have the personremain in that position for about 30 seconds. Thiswill allow the system to detect the person and toenable the passenger airbag. If the "PASSEN-GER AIR BAG OFF" indicator is still on, turn theignition key to "LOCK" and ask the passenger tosit properly and restart the engine again.If the "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF" indicator isstill on, ask the passenger to move to the rearseat. After the vehicle starts, the "PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF" indicator will not change accord-ing to the passenger's posture.

Normal position

B990A01O


45

! WARNING:o Do not modify or replace the front pas-

senger seat. Don't place anything on orattach anything such as a blanket orafter market seat heater to the frontpassenger seat. This can adversely af-fect the occupant classification system.

o Do not sit on sharp objects such as toolswhen occupying the front passengerseat. This can adversely affect the occu-pant classification system.

o Do not use accessory seat covers on thefront seats.

o Accident statistics show that childrenare safer if they are restrained in the rear,as opposed to the front seat. It is recom-mended that child restraints be securedin a rear seat, including an infant ridingin a rear-facing infant seat, a child ridingin a forward-facing child seat and anolder child riding in a booster seat.

! WARNING:o A smaller-stature adult who is not seated

correctly (for example: seat excessivelyreclined, leaning on the center console,or hips shifted forward in the seat) cancause a condition where the advancedfrontal airbag system senses less weightthan if the occupant were seated prop-erly (sitting upright with the seatback inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion with their seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and their feet onthe floor). This condition can result in anadult potentially being misclassified andillumination of the "PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF" indicator.

B990B04Y-AAT

Side Impact Airbag (If installed)

Your Hyundai is equipped with a side impactairbag in each front seat. The purpose of theairbag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/orthe front passenger with additional protectionthan that offered by the seat belt alone. The sideimpact airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side-impact collisions, depend-ing on the crash severity, angle, speed and pointof impact. The side impact airbags are notdesigned to deploy in all side impact situations.

B990B02LZ


46

!o To prevent unexpected deployment of

the side impact airbag that may result inpersonal injury, avoid impact to the sideimpact sensor when the ignition key ison.

WARNING:!o For best protection from the side impact

airbag system and to avoid being injuredby the deploying side impact airbag,both front seat occupants should sit inan upright position with the seat beltproperly fastened. The driver's handsshould be placed on the steering wheelat the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. Thepassenger's arms and hands should beplaced on their laps.

o Do not use any accessory seat covers.o Use of seat covers could reduce or pre-

vent the effectiveness of the system.o Do not install any accessories on the

side or near the side impact airbag.o Do not use excessive force on the side of

the seat.o Do not place any objects over the airbag

or between the airbag and yourself.o Do not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door and thefront seat. Such objects may becomedangerous projectiles and cause injuryif the supplemental side impact airbaginflates.

WARNING:

WARNING:o The side impact airbag is supplemental

to the driver's and the passenger's seatbelt systems and is not a substitute forthem. Therefore your seat belts must beworn at all times while the vehicle is inmotion. The airbags deploy only in cer-tain side impact conditions severeenough to cause significant injury to thevehicle occupants.

!

B990B01NFSide impact sensor


47

B990C01LZ-GAT

Curtain Airbag

Curtain airbags are located along both sides ofthe roof rails above the front and rear doors.They are designed to help protect the heads ofthe front seat occupants and the rear outboardseat occupants in certain side impact collisions.

The curtain airbags are designed to deploy onlyduring certain side impact collisions, dependingon the crash severity, angle, speed and impact.The curtain airbags are not designed to deployin all side impact situations, collisions from thefront or rear of the vehicle or in most rolloversituations.

HLZ2051

Curtain Airbag

B240C01NF-AAT

SRS Care

The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and sothere are no parts you can safely service byyourself. If the SRS "AIRBAG" warning lightdoes not illuminate, or continuously remains on,have your vehicle immediately inspected byyour Hyundai dealer.

Any work on the SRS system, such as remov-ing, installing, repairing, or any work on thesteering wheel must be performed by a qualifiedHyundai technician. Improper handling of theSRS system may result in serious personalinjury.

WARNING:o Do not install a child restraint system in

the front passenger seat position.A child restraint system must never beplaced in the front seat. The infant orchild could be severely injured by anairbag deployment in case of an acci-dent.

o Modification to SRS components or wir-ing, including the addition of any kind ofbadges to the pad covers or modifica-tions to the body structure, can ad-versely affect SRS performance and leadto possible injury.

o For cleaning the airbag pad covers, useonly a soft, dry cloth or one which hasbeen moistened with plain water. Sol-vents or cleaners could adversely affectthe airbag covers and proper deploy-ment of the system.

o No objects should be placed over or nearthe airbag modules on the steering wheel,instrument panel, and the frontpassenger's panel above the glove box,because any such object could causeharm if the vehicle is in a crash severeenough to cause the airbags to inflate.

!

HSM393


48

B240D01NF-AAT

Additional Safety Precautions

o Never let passengers ride in the cargoarea (trunk) or on top of a folded-downback seat. All occupants should sit upright,fully back in their seats with their seat beltson and their feet on the floor.

o Passengers should not move out of orchange seats while the vehicle is mov-ing. A passenger who is not wearing a seatbelt during a crash or emergency stop canbe thrown against the inside of the vehicle,against other occupants, or out of the ve-hicle.

o Each seat belt is designed to restrain oneoccupant. If more than one person uses thesame seat belt, they could be seriouslyinjured or killed in a collision.

o Do not use any accessories on seatbelts. Devices claiming to improve occu-pant comfort or reposition the seat belt canreduce the protection provided by the seatbelt and increase the chance of seriousinjury in a crash.

o Passengers should not place hard orsharp objects between themselves andthe airbags. Carrying hard or sharp objectson your lap or in your mouth can result ininjuries if an airbag inflates.

o Keep occupants away from the airbagcovers. All occupants should sit upright, fullyback in their seats with their seat belts on andtheir feet on the floor. If occupants are tooclose to the airbag covers, they could beinjured if the airbags inflate.

o Do not attach or place objects on or nearthe airbag covers. Any object attached toor placed on the front or side impact airbagcovers could interfere with the proper opera-tion of the airbags.

o Do not modify the front seats. Modifica-tion of the front seats could interfere with theoperation of the supplemental restraint sys-tem sensing components or side impactairbags.

o Do not place items under the front seats.Placing items under the front seats couldinterfere with the operation of the supple-mental restraint system sensing compo-nents and wiring harnesses.

o If the airbags inflate, they must be re-placed by an authorized Hyundai dealer.

o Do not tamper with or disconnect SRSwiring, or other components of the SRSsystem. Doing so could result in injury,due to accidental inflation of the airbagsor by rendering the SRS inoperative.

o If components of the airbag system mustbe discarded, or if the vehicle must bescrapped, certain safety precautionsmust be observed. Your Hyundai dealerknows these precautions and can giveyou the necessary information. Failureto follow these precautions and proce-dures could increase the risk of personalinjury.

o If you sell your vehicle, make certain thatthis manual is transferred to the newowner.

o If your car was flooded and has soakedcarpeting or water on flooring, youshouldn't try to start the engine; havethe car towed to an authorized Hyundaidealer.

! WARNING:


49

! WARNING:o Sitting improperly or out of position can

result in serious injury or death in acrash.

o Always sit upright with the seatback inan upright position, centered on the seatcushion with your seat belt on, legscomfortably extended and your feet onthe floor.

o Never hold an infant or child on your lap.The infant or child could be seriously injuredor killed in the event of a crash. All infants andchildren should be properly restrained inappropriate child safety seats or seat beltsin the rear seat.

Adding Equipment to or Modifying YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle.

If you modify your vehicle by changing yourvehicle's frame, bumper system, front end orside sheet metal or ride height, this may affectthe operation of your vehicle's airbag system.


50 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260A01NF-AAT

B260B01NF-A


51

1. Tachometer2. Door Ajar Warning Light3. Seat Belt Warning Light (Driver's side)4. High Beam Indicator Light5. Turn Signal Indicator Lights6. Speedometer7. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Lights

(If Installed)8. Front Fog Light Indicator Light9. ABS Service Reminder Indicator (SRI) (If Installed)10. Coolant Temperature Gauge11. Fuel Gauge

12. Parking Brake/Low Brake Fluid Level Warning Light13. Low Oil Pressure Warning Light14. Charging System Warning Light15. Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level Warning Light16. Check Engine - Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)17. SRS (Airbag) Warning Light18. Automatic Transaxle Position Indicator Light (If Installed)19. Odometer/ Trip Odometer/ Trip Computer (If Installed)20. CRUISE Indicator Light21. Cruise SET Indicator Light22. Trunk Lid Open Warning Light23. Low Fuel Warning Light


52 WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

B260B01JM-AAT

SRS (Airbag) Warning Light

The SRS warning light comes on for about 6seconds after the key is turned to the "ON"position or after the engine is started, after whichit will go out.

This light also comes on when the SRS is notworking properly. If the AIRBAG warning lightdoes not come on, or continuously remains onafter operating for about 6 seconds when youturned the ignition key to the "ON" position orstarted the engine, or if it comes on while driving,have the SRS inspected by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

B260D01A-AAT

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The blinking green arrows on the instrumentpanel show the direction indicated by the turnsignals. If the arrow comes on but does not blink,blinks more rapidly than normal, or does notilluminate at all, a malfunction in the turn signalsystem is indicated. Your dealer should beconsulted for repairs.

B260E01NF-AAT

Seat Belt Reminder Lightand Chime (Driver's side)

The driver's seat belt reminder light blinks andthe warning chime sounds for 6 seconds whenthe ignition key is turned from the "OFF" positionto the "ON" or "START" position to remind thedriver to fasten the driver's seat belt.

B260F01A-AAT

High Beam Indicator Light

The high beam indicator light comes on when-ever the headlights are switched to the highbeam or flash position.

B260G01A-AAT

Low Oil Pressure Warning Light

CAUTION:If the low oil pressure warning light stays onwhile the engine is running, serious enginedamage may result. The oil pressure warninglight comes on whenever there is insufficientoil pressure. In normal operation, it shouldcome on when the ignition switch is turned on,then go out when the engine is started. If theoil pressure warning light stays on while theengine is running, there is a serious malfunc-tion.If this happens, stop the car as soon as it is safeto do so, turn off the engine and check the oillevel. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil tothe proper level and start the engine again. Ifthe light stays on with the engine running, turnthe engine off immediately. In any instancewhere the oil light stays on when the engineis running, the engine should be checked bya Hyundai dealer before the car is driven again.

!

B260A01Y-GAT

Front Fog Light Indicator Light

This fog indicator light comes on when theignition key is turned to the "ON" position and thefront fog light switch is on.


53

!

B260H02A-AAT

Parking Brake/Low Brake FluidLevel Warning Light

The brake fluid level warning light indicates thatthe brake fluid level in the brake master cylinderis low and hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications should beadded. After adding fluid, if no other trouble isfound, the car should be immediately and care-fully driven to a Hyundai dealer for inspection.If further trouble is experienced, the vehicleshould not be driven at all but taken to a dealerby a professional towing service or some othersafe method.Your Hyundai is equipped with dual-diagonalbraking systems. This means you still havebraking on two wheels even if one of the dualsystems should fail. With only one of the dualsystems working, more than normal pedal traveland greater pedal pressure are required to stopthe car. Also, the car will not stop in as short adistance with only half of the brake systemworking. If the brakes fail while you are driving,shift to a lower gear for additional engine brakingand stop the car as soon as it is safe to do so.

WARNING:If you suspect brake trouble, have yourbrakes checked by a Hyundai dealer assoon as possible. Driving your car with aproblem in either the brake electrical sys-tem or brake hydraulic system is danger-ous, and could result in a serious injury ordeath.

Warning Light OperationThe parking brake/brake fluid level warning lightshould come on when the parking brake isapplied and the ignition switch is turned to "ON"or "START". After the engine is started, the lightshould go out when the parking brake is re-leased.If the parking brake is not applied, the warninglight should come on when the ignition switch isturned to "ON" or "START", then go out whenthe engine starts. If the light comes on at anyother time, you should slow the vehicle and bringit to a complete stop in a safe location off theroadway.

B260J02A-AAT

Charging System Warning Light

The charging system warning light should comeon when the ignition is turned on, then go outwhen the engine is running. If the light stays onwhile the engine is running, there is a malfunc-tion in the electrical charging system. If the lightcomes on while you are driving, stop, turn off theengine and check under the hood. First, makecertain the generator drive belt is in place. If it is,check the tension of the belt. Do this as shownon page 6-19 by pushing down on the center ofthe belt. Have the system checked by yourHyundai dealer as soon as possible.

B260K01S-AAT

Trunk Lid Open Warning Light

This light remains on unless the trunk lid iscompletely closed and latched.


54

B260L02HP-GAT

Door Ajar Warning Light andChime

The door ajar warning light warns you that a dooris not completely closed and the chime warnsyou that the key is in the ignition switch.

NOTE :The warning chime only sounds wheneverthe key is in the ignition switch and thedriver's side front door is open simulta-neously. The chime sounds until the key isremoved from the ignition switch or thedriver's side front door is closed.

!

B260M01A-AAT

Low Fuel Level Warning Light

The low fuel level warning light comes on whenthe fuel tank is approaching empty. When itcomes on, you should add fuel as soon aspossible. Driving with the fuel level warning lighton or with the fuel level below "E" can cause theengine to misfire and damage the catalyticconverter.

B260P02Y-GAT

ABS Service ReminderIndicator (SRI) (If Installed)

When the key is turned to the "ON" position, theAnti-Lock Brake System indicator will come onand then go off in a few seconds. If the ABS SRIremains on, comes on while driving, or does notcome on when the key is turned to the "ON"position, this indicates that there may be aproblem with the ABS.If this occurs, have your vehicle checked byyour Hyundai dealer as soon as possible. Thenormal braking system will still be operational,but without the assistance of the anti-lock brakesystem.

WARNING:If both the ABS SRI and Parking Brake/Brake fluid level warning lights remain "ON"or come on while driving, there may be aproblem with E.B.D. (Electronic Brake ForceDistribution).If this occurs, avoid sudden stops and haveyour vehicle checked by your Hyundai dealeras soon as possible.

B260N02A-AAT

Check Engine - Malfunction In-dicator Light (MIL)

This light illuminates when there is a malfunctionof an exhaust gas related component, and thesystem is not functioning properly so that theexhaust gas regulation values are not satisfied.This light will also illuminate when the ignition keyis turned to the "ON" position, and will go out in afew seconds after the engine is started. If itilluminates while driving, or does not illuminatewhen the ignition key is turned to the "ON" position,take your car to your nearest authorized Hyundaidealer and have the system checked.

B265C01NF-AAT

Electronic Stability Control(ESC) Indicator Lights(If Installed)

The electronic stability control indicators changeoperation according to the ignition switch posi-tion and whether the system is in operation ornot.They will illuminate when the ignition key isturned to the "ON" position, but should go outafter three seconds. If the ESC or ESC-OFFindicator stays on, take your car to your autho-rized Hyundai dealer and have the systemchecked. See section 2 for more informationabout the ESC.


55

B270A01O-AAT

BRAKE PAD WEAR WARNING SOUND

The front and rear disc brake pads have wearindicators that should make a high-pitchedsquealing or scraping noise when new pads areneeded. The sound may come and go or beheard all the time when the vehicle is moving. Itmay also be heard when the brake pedal ispushed down firmly. Excessive rotor damagewill result if the worn pads are not replaced. Seeyour Hyundai dealer immediately.

B260Q01NF-GAT

CRUISE Indicator Light

The cruise indicator light in the instrument clus-ter is illuminated when the cruise control ON/OFF button on the steering wheel is pushed.The indicator light turns off when the cruisecontrol ON/OFF button is pushed again. Infor-mation about the use of cruise control begins onpage 1-93.

B260R01NF-GAT

Cruise SET Indicator Light

The Cruise SET indicator light in the instrumentcluster is illuminated when the cruise control"COAST/SET" or "RES/ACCEL" switch ispushed. The Cruise SET indicator light does notilluminate when the cruise control "CANCEL"switch is pushed or the system is disengaged.To disengage the cruise control system, referto "To cancel the cruise speed" on page 1-94.

B260S01NF-GAT

Low Windshield Washer FluidLevel Warning Light

The low windshield washer fluid warning lightcomes on when the washer fluid reservoir isapproaching empty. When it comes on, addwasher fluid at your earliest opportunity.

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

B280A01NF-AAT

FUEL GAUGE

The needle on the gauge indicates the approxi-mate fuel level in the fuel tank. The fuel capacityis given in section 9.

NOTE:The " " symbol means, the fuel fillerlid is located on the left side of the vehicle.

B280A01NF


56

B330A03A-AAT

TACHOMETER

The tachometer registers the speed of yourengine in revolutions per minute (rpm).

CAUTION:The engine should not be raced to such aspeed that the needle enters the red zoneon the tachometer face. This can causesevere engine damage and may void yourwarranty coverage.

!!

B290A03A-AAT

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATUREGAUGE

WARNING:Never remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. The engine coolant is underpressure and could erupt and cause severeburns. Wait until the engine is cool beforeadding coolant to the reservoir.

The normal range is approximately in the middlebetween "H" and "C". If it moves across the dialto "H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon aspossible and turn off the engine. Then open thehood and, after the engine has cooled, check thecoolant level (See "If the engine overheats" onthe page 3-4.) and the water pump drive belt. If yoususpect cooling system trouble, have your cool-ing system checked by a Hyundai dealer as soonas possible.

B290A01NF

B330A01NF

RedZone


57

B300A01A-AAT

SPEEDOMETER

Your Hyundai's speedometer is calibrated inmiles per hour or kilometers per hour.

B300A01NF-A

B300A02NF-A

2.4L

3.3L

B310B01NF-AAT

ODOMETER/TRIP ODOMETER

1. Odometer

The odometer records the total distance trav-eled in miles. You will also find the odometeruseful to determine when periodic maintenanceshould be performed.

NOTE:Federal law forbids alteration of the odom-eter of any vehicle with the intent to changethe mileage registered on the odometer.The alteration may void your warranty cov-erage.

Pushing in the TRIP switch behind the left sideof the steering wheel when the ignition switch isturned "ON" will display two trip odometers inmiles.

B310B01NF-A

B400B01NF-A

With Automatic Transaxle

With Manual Transaxle

2. Trip Odometer(Without Trip Computer)


58

With Automatic Transaxle

With Manual Transaxle

B310B03NF-A

B310B04NF-A

TRIP COMPUTER

B400B01NF-AAT

(With Automatic Transaxle)(If Installed)

The trip computer is a microcomputer-con-trolled driver information gauge that displaysinformation related to driving, such as estimatedtripmeter, drive time, average speed, averagefuel consumption and distance to empty on theLCD.

B400B08NF-A

B310B02NF-A

To shift from TRIP A to TRIP B, press the TRIPswitch.

TRIP A: First distance you have traveledfrom your origination point to a firstdestination.

TRIP B: Second distance from the first des-tination to the final destination.

When the RESET switch is pressed for 1 sec-ond, the trip odometer will reset to 0.


59

TRIPMETER

DRIVE TIME

AVERAGE SPEED

AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION

DISTANCE TO EMPTY

Pushing in the TRIP switch when the ignitionswitch is in "ON" position changes the displayas follows;

B400B01NF-A

TRIP SWITCH 1. Tripmeter (Miles)

o This mode indicates the total distance trav-elled since the last tripmeter reset. Totaldistance is also reset to zero if the battery isdisconnected.

o Pressing the RESET switch for more than 1second, when the tripmeter is being dis-played, clears the tripmeter to zero.

o The meter's working range is from 0 to 999.9miles.

B400B03NF-A

Odometer

Tripmeter

RESET SWITCH

Push in the RESET switch more than 1 secondto initialize the displayed information such astripmeter, average speed, average fuel con-sumption and drive time.

B310B02NF-A


60

2. Drive Time

o This mode indicates the total time from thestarting of the engine to the ignition key"OFF" after resetting. When the RESETswitch is pushed, it will be initialized to '0:00'.

o The drive time will be initialized to '0:00' afterbeing displayed to '99:59'.

B400B04NF-A

Odometer

Drive time

3. Average Speed (MPH)

o This mode indicates the average speed fromthe starting of the engine to the ignition key"OFF".

o Average speed is reset to zero if the batteryis disconnected.

o To reset the average speed to zero (---),press the RESET switch for more than 1second.

o When you drive 0.5 mile and less afterresetting, the average speed will be dis-played to '---'.

B400B05NF-A

Average speed

Odometer

4. Average Fuel Consumption (MPG)

o This mode calculates the average fuel con-sumption from the total fuel used and thedistance since the last average consump-tion reset.

o The total fuel used is calculated from the fuelconsumption input.

o Average fuel consumption is reset to zero ifthe battery is disconnected.

o To reset the average fuel consumption tozero (--), press the RESET switch for morethan 1 second.

o When you drive 0.5 mile and less afterresetting, the average fuel consumption willbe displayed to '--'.

HNF2084-A

Average fuel consumption

Odometer


61MULTI-FUNCTION LIGHT SWITCH

B340A01A-AAT

COMBINATION TURN SIGNAL,HEADLIGHT AND HIGH-BEAMSWITCHTurn Signal Operation

Pulling down on the lever causes the turnsignals on the left side of the car to blink. Pushingupwards on the lever causes the turn signals onthe right side of the car to blink. As the turn iscompleted, the lever will automatically return tothe center position and turn off the turn signalsat the same time. If either turn signal indicatorlight blinks more rapidly than usual, goes on butdoes not blink, or does not go on at all, there isa malfunction in the system. Check for a burned-out fuse or bulb or see your Hyundai dealer.

5. Distance to Empty (Miles)

o When the distance to empty is less than 30miles (50 km), the distance to empty digits (----) will blink until more fuel is added.

NOTE:o The distance to empty can differ from

the actual tripmeter according to drivingconditions.

o The distance to empty can vary accord-ing to the driving conditions, drivingpattern or vehicle speed.

o This mode indicates the estimated distanceto empty from the current fuel level in the fueltank.

o The trip computer may not register additionalfuel if less than 1.36 gallons (6 liters) of fuelare added to the vehicle.

B400B06NF-A

Distance to empty letterDistance to empty

B400B07NF-AOdometer


62

B340D01A-AAT

High-beam SwitchB340B01A-AAT

Lane Change Signal

To indicate a lane change, move the lever up ordown to a point where it begins flashing.The lever will automatically return to the centerposition when released.

B340C03A-AAT

Headlight Switch

To operate the headlights, turn the barrel on theend of the multi-function switch. The first posi-tion turns on the parking lights, sidelights, taillights and instrument panel lights. The secondposition turns on the headlights.

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionto turn on the headlights.

Parking Light Auto Off

If you do not turn the parking lights "OFF" afterdriving, the parking lights will automatically shut"OFF" when the driver's door is opened.To turn them "ON" again, you must simply turnthe ignition key to the "ON" position.

B340B01NF B340C01NF

To turn on the headlight high beams, push thelever forward (away from you). The High BeamIndicator Light will come on at the same time. Forlow beams, pull the lever back toward you.

B340D01NF


63

B340E01A-AAT

Headlight Flasher

To flash the headlights, pull the switch levertoward you, then release it. The headlights canbe flashed even though the headlight switch isin the "OFF" position.

B340E01NF

B340G01LZ-AAT

Auto Light (If Installed)

HNF2094

To operate the automatic light feature, turn thebarrel on the end of the multi-function switch. Ifyou set the multi-function switch to "AUTO", thetail lights and headlights will be turned automati-cally on or off according to external illuminationconditions.

NOTE:Turn the lights manually in foggy, cloudyand rainy conditions.

NOTE:o Never place anything over the sensor

located on the instrument panel to en-sure better auto light system control.

o Don't clean the sensor using a windowcleaner.

o If your vehicle has window tint or othertypes of coating on the windshield, theAUTO light system may not work prop-erly.

Auto lightsensor

B340G02NF-A


64 WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHERSWITCH

B350A01A-AAT

The windshield wiper switch has three posi-tions:

1. Intermittent wiper operation2. Low-speed operation3. High-speed operation

NOTE:To prevent damage to the wiper system, donot attempt to wipe away heavy accumula-tions of snow or ice. Accumulated snowand ice should be removed manually. Ifthere is only a light layer of snow or ice,operate the heater in the defrost mode tomelt the snow or ice before using the wiper.

HNF2101-A

(1)

(2)

(3)

B350B01O-GAT

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the windshield washer, pull the wiper/washer lever toward the steering wheel. Whenthe washer lever is operated, the wipers auto-matically make two passes across the wind-shield. The washer continues to operate untilthe lever is released.

NOTE:o Do not operate the washer more than 15

seconds at a time or when the fluidreservoir is empty.

o In icy or freezing weather, be sure thewiper blades are not frozen to the glassprior to operating the wipers.

o In areas where water freezes in winter,use windshield washer antifreeze.

HNF2103-A

FRONT FOG LIGHT SWITCH

B360B01L-AAT

To turn on the front fog lights, place the switchin the "ON" position. They will light when theheadlight switch is in the second position.

NOTE:If you turn on the headlight high beams, thefront fog lights will be turned off.

B360B02NF


65

B350C01NF-AAT

Adjustable Intermittent Wiper Operation

To use the intermittent wiper feature, place thewiper switch in the "INT" position. With theswitch in this position, the interval betweenwipes can be varied from approximately 1 to 18seconds by turning the interval adjuster barrel.

HNF2102-A

HAZARD WARNING SYSTEM

B370A01A-AAT

The hazard warning system should be usedwhenever you find it necessary to stop the carin a hazardous location. When you must makesuch an emergency stop, always pull off theroad as far as possible.The hazard warning lights are turned on bypushing in the hazard switch. This causes allturn signal lights to blink. The hazard warninglights will operate even though the key is not inthe ignition.To turn the hazard warning lights off, push theswitch a second time.

B370A01NF-AHNF2104-A

Mist Wiper Operation

If a single wipe is desired to clear mist, push thewindshield wiper and washer control lever up-wards.


66 DIGITAL CLOCK

B400A01NF-GAT

There are three control buttons for the digitalclock. Their functions are:

H - Push "H" to advance the hour indicated.M - Push "M" to advance the minute indicated.R - Push "R" to reset minutes to ":00" to

facilitate resetting the clock to the correcttime. When this is done:Pressing "R" between 11 : 01 and 11 : 29changes the readout to 11 : 00.Pressing "R" between 11 : 30 and 11 : 59changes the readout to 12 : 00.Push the "R" button for 5 seconds to displaya 12 or 24-hour clock.

B400A01NF-A

NOTE:The ignition must be in the "ON" positionfor the rear window defroster to operate.

CAUTION:Do not clean the inner side of the rearwindow glass with an abrasive type of glasscleaner or use a scraper to remove foreigndeposits from the inner surface of the glassas this may cause damage to the defrosterelements.

!B380A01HP-AAT

The rear window defroster switch also acti-vates the outside rearview mirror heaters.The rear window defroster and heated outsiderearview mirrors are turned on by pushing in theswitch. To turn the defroster off, push the switcha second time. The rear window defrosterautomatically turns itself off after about 20 min-utes. To restart the defroster cycle, push in theswitch again after it has turned itself off.

HNF2113-A

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTERSWITCH

With Manual A/C

With Automatic A/C


67INSTRUMENT PANEL LIGHTCONTROL (RHEOSTAT)

B410A01A-AAT

The instrument panel lights can be made brighteror dimmer by turning the instrument panel lightcontrol knob.

B410A01NF-A

CIGARETTE LIGHTER

B420A02A-AAT

For the cigarette lighter to work, the key mustbe in the "ACC" position or the "ON" position.To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the wayinto its socket. When the element has heated,the lighter will pop out to the "ready" position.Do not hold the cigarette lighter pressed in. Thiscan damage the heating element and create afire hazard.If it is necessary to replace the cigarette lighter,use only a genuine Hyundai replacement or itsapproved equivalent.

B420A01NF

! CAUTION:Do not use electric accessories or equip-ment other than the Hyundai genuine partsin the socket.

POWER OUTLETS

B500D01NF-AAT

The power outlets are located on the centerfascia panel and in the trunk.These supply 12V electric power to operateelectric accessories or equipment only whenthe key is in the "ON" or "ACC" position.

HNF2182


68 ASHTRAY

B430A02NF-GAT

The front ashtray may be opened by pushingand releasing the ashtray lid. To clean ashtray,the plastic receptacle should be removed bylifting the plastic ash receptacle upward andpulling it out. The ashtray light will only illuminatewhen the external lights are on.

B430A01NF

B450A01NF-GAT

Front Drink Holder

The drink holder for holding cups or cans islocated on the main console. The drink holdercan be used by lifting its cover.

HNF2184

DRINK HOLDER

! CAUTION:o Use the power outlets only when the

engine is running and remove the plugfrom the power outlet after using theelectric device. Using the power outletswhen the engine stops or keeping theelectric device plugged in for many hoursmay cause the battery to discharge.

o Do not use the power outlet to connectelectric accessories or equipment thatare not designed to operate on 12 volts.

o Some electronic devices can cause elec-tronic interference when plugged intothe power outlet. These devices maycause excessive audio noise and mal-functions in other electronic systems ordevices in your vehicle.


69

! CAUTION:Place the drink holder in its closed positionwhile not in use.

HNF2185

B450B01NF-GAT

Rear Drink Holder

The rear drink holder for holding cups or cansis located in the center of the rear seat armrest.

! WARNING:o Use caution when using the drink hold-

ers. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure you or your passengers. Spilledliquids can damage interior trim andelectrical components.

o Do not place objects other than cups orcans in the drink holder. These objectscan be thrown out in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possiblyinjuring the passengers in the vehicle.

SHOPPING BAG HOLDER

B540A01NF-AAT

HNF2179

!

Shopping bag holder is located on the left sideof the glove box.

CAUTION:Do not hang a bag beyond 7lbs (3 kg). It maycause damage to the shopping bag holder.


70

!

SUNROOF

B460A02Y-AAT

(If Installed)Sun Shade

B460A01NF

Your HYUNDAI is equipped with a sliding sun-shade which you can manually adjust to let inlight with the sunroof closed, or to block sunlight.

WARNING:Never adjust the sunshade while driving.This could result in loss of control and anaccident that may cause death, seriousinjury, or property damage.

B460B01NF-GAT

Opening the Sunroof System

If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, youcan slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroofcontrol buttons located on the overhead con-sole.The sunroof can only be opened, closed, ortilted when the ignition switch is in the "ON"position.

HNF2026

SEATBACK POCKET

B540B01E-GAT

HNF2042

The seatback pockets for holding papers arelocated on the backside of the front seats.


71

Sliding the sunroofAuto slide open

To use the auto slide feature, momentarily(more than 1 second) press the SLIDE OPEN( ) button on the overhead console. Thesunroof will slide all the way open. To stop thesunroof sliding at any point, press any sunroofcontrol button.

Manual slide open

Press the SLIDE OPEN ( ) button on theoverhead console for less than 0.5 second.

CloseAuto slide close

To close the sunroof, press the TILT UP ( )button on the overhead console for more than1 second.The sunroof will slide all the way close. To stopat the desired point, press any sunroof controlbutton.

Manual slide close

Press the TILT UP( ) button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

B460C01NF-GAT

Tilting the Sunroof System

Auto tilt open

To use the auto tilt feature, momentarily (morethan 1 second) press the TILT UP ( ) buttonon the overhead console. The sunroof will tilt allthe way open. To stop the sunroof tilting at anypoint, press any sunroof control button.

Manual tilt open

Press the TILT UP ( ) button on the overheadconsole for less than 0.5 second.

!

Close

To close the sunroof, press the SLIDE OPEN( ) button on the overhead console and holdit until the sunroof is closed.

NOTE:After washing the car or after there is rain,be sure to wipe off any water that is on thesunroof before operating it.

HNF2027

WARNING:o Do not close a sunroof if anyone's hands,

arms or body are between the slidingglass and the sunroof sash, as this couldresult in injury.

o Do not place your head or arms out of thesunroof opening at any time.


72

B460D01NF-GAT

Manual Operation of Sunroof

If the sunroof does not operate electrically:

1. Open the spectacle case.2. Remove the two mounting screws of the

front overhead console with a phillips screw-driver.

HNF2028

3. Insert the hexagonal head wrench providedwith the vehicle into the socket. This wrenchcan be found in the vehicle's glove box.

4. Turn the wrench clockwise to open or coun-terclockwise to close the sunroof.

HNF2029

! CAUTION:o Do not open the sunroof in severely cold

temperatures or when it is covered withice or snow.

o Periodically remove any dirt that mayhave accumulated on the guide rails.

o Do not press any sunroof control buttonlonger than necessary. Damage to themotor or system components couldoccur.


73

! CAUTION:If the sunroof is not reset, it may not operateproperly.

B460E01NF-AAT

Resetting the sunroof

Whenever the vehicle battery is disconnectedor discharged, or you use the emergency handleto operate the sunroof, you have to reset yoursunroof system as follows:

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ON" position.2. According to the position of the sunroof, do

as follows.1) In case that the sunroof has closed com-

pletely or been tilted : Press the TILT UPbutton for 1 second.

2) In case that the sunroof has been opened:Press and hold the TILT UP button formore than 5 seconds until the sunroofhas closed completely. Then press theTILT UP button for 1 second.

3. Then, release it.4. Press and hold the TILT UP button once

again until the sunroof has returned to theoriginal TILT UP position after it raises a littlehigher than the maximum TILT UP position.When this is complete, the sunroof systemis reset.

B480B01Y-AAT

Map Light

Push in the map light switch to turn the light onor off. This light produces a spot beam forconvenient use as a map light at night or as apersonal light for the driver and the passenger.

B480B01NF

INTERIOR LIGHT

Without sunroof

With sunroof

B490A02NF-GAT

Interior Light

The interior courtesy light has two buttons. Thetwo buttons are:

o DOOR

In the "DOOR" position, the interior courtesylight comes on when any door is opened regard-less of the ignition key position. The light goesout gradually 30 seconds after the door isclosed.

o ON

In the "ON" position, the light stays on at alltimes.

HNF2110


74

CAUTION:Do not leave this button pressed for anextended period of time when the vehicle isnot running.

!

SPECTACLE CASE

!

B491A03O-GAT

The spectacle case is located on the frontoverhead console.Push the end of the cover to open the spectaclecase.

WARNING:Do not keep objects except spectacles in-side the spectacle case. Such objects canbe thrown from the case in the event of asudden stop or an accident, possibly injur-ing the passengers in the vehicle.

HNF2183

!

STORAGE BOX

B500A01Y-AAT

GLOVE BOX

WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the glove boxdoor should be kept closed when the car isin motion.

o To open the glove box, pull on the glove boxrelease lever.

o The glove box door can be locked (andunlocked) with the key.

HNF2175


75

B500A01NF-GAT

ACCESSORY BOX

The accessory box may be opened by pushingthe knob downward.It is used for storing small articles.

B500A01NF

B500B01HP-DAT

MULTI BOX

The multi box may be opened by pulling it out byits grip. It is used for storing small articles.

B500B02NF-A

B500B01NF-GAT

Illuminated Glove Box

Opening the glove box will automatically turn onthe light when the multi-function switch is turnedto the first position.


76

! WARNING:To avoid the possibility of injury in case ofan accident or a sudden stop, the centerconsole box lid should be kept closed whenthe car is in motion.

HNF2178

The center console box can be used as arm-rest. To use the console armrest, pull out theconsole box lid by pulling up the handle asshown.

NOTE:When not in use, always be sure it is lockedin position properly.

B505B01NF-GAT

Center Console Armrest(If Installed)

The center console box is used for storingcassette tapes or small articles.To use the center console box, pull up thehandle and lift the lid as shown.

CENTER CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

B505A01NF-GAT

Center Console Box

HNF2176

HNF2177


77

!

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR

! WARNING:Do not place cups or cans in the drinkholder when the console box lid is used asan armrest. It may result in spilling thebeverage. A spilled beverage that is very hotcan injure you or your passengers. Spilledliquids can damage interior trim and elec-tric components.

B510B01Y-AAT

Electric Type

The outside rearview mirrors can be adjustedto your preferred rear vision, both directly be-hind the vehicle, and to the rear of the left andright sides.The remote control outside rearview mirrorswitch controls the adjustments for both rightand left outside mirrors.

To adjust the position of either mirror:

1. Move the selecting switch to the right or leftto activate the adjustable mechanism for thecorresponding door mirror.

2. Adjust mirror angle by depressing the appro-priate perimeter switch as illustrated.

B510B01NF

CAUTION:o Do not operate the switch continuously

for an unnecessary length of time.o Scraping ice from the mirror face could

cause permanent damage. To removeany ice, use a sponge, soft cloth orapproved de-icer.

!

WARNING:Be careful when judging the size or dis-tance of any object seen in the passengerside rearview mirror. It is a convex mirrorwith a curved surface, and any objects seenin this mirror are closer than they appear.


78

The outside rearview mirror heater is actuated inconnection with the rear window defroster. To heatthe outside rearview mirror glass, push in the switchfor the rear window defroster. The rearview mirrorglass will be heated for defrosting or defogging andwill give you improved rear vision in inclementweather conditions. Push the switch again to turnthe heater off. The outside rearview mirror heaterautomatically turns itself off after 20 minutes.

B510D01HP-AAT

OUTSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR HEATER

HNF2113-A

With Manual A/C

With Automatic A/C

DAY/NIGHT INSIDE REARVIEWMIRROR

B520A01A-AAT

Manual Type

Your Hyundai is equipped with a day/night insiderearview mirror. The "night" position is selectedby flipping the tab at the bottom of the mirrortoward you. In the "night" position, the glare ofheadlights of cars behind you is reduced.

B520A01NF


79HOMELINK MIRROR

B520C01NF-AAT

Automatic-Dimming Mirrorwith Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass Dis-play and HomeLink® (If Installed)

Your vehicle comes with a Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror with a Z-Nav™ Electronic Com-pass Display and an Integrated HomeLink®

Wireless Control System. During nighttime driv-ing, this safety feature will automatically detectand eliminate dangerous rearview mirror glarewhile the compass indicates the direction thevehicle is pointed. The HomeLink® UniversalTransceiver allows you to activate your garagedoor(s), estate gate, home lighting, etc.

1. Channel 1 Button2. Channel 2 Button3. Status Indicator LED4. Channel 3 Button

5. Rear Light Sensor6. Dimming On/Off Button7. Compass Control Button8. Display

B520C01NF


80

Automatic-Dimming Night VisionSafety™ (NVS®) Mirror

The NVS® Mirror in your vehicle is the mostadvanced way to eliminate dangerous and an-noying glare in the rearview mirror during anydriving situation. For more information regard-ing NVS® mirrors and other applications, pleaserefer to the Gentex website:www.gentex.com.

CAUTION:The NVS® Mirror automatically reduces glareduring driving conditions based upon lightlevels monitored in front of the vehicle andfrom the rear of the vehicle. These lightsensors are visible through openings in thefront and rear of the mirror case. Any objectthat would obstruct either light sensor willdegrade the automatic dimming controlfeature.

!

Automatic-Dimming Function

To protect your vision during nighttime driving,your mirror will automatically dim upon detectingglare from the vehicles traveling behind you.The auto-dimming function can be controlled bythe Dimming ON/OFF Button:

1. Pressing the button turns the auto-dimming function OFF which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LED turning off.

2. Pressing the button again turns the auto-dimming function ON which is indicated bythe green Status Indicator LED turning on.

NOTE:The mirror defaults to the "ON" positioneach time the vehicle is started.

Compass Function

The Compass can be turned ON and OFF andwill remember the last state when the ignition iscycled. To turn the display feature ON/OFF:1. Press and release the button to turn the

display feature OFF.2. Press and release the button again to

turn the display back ON.Additional options can be set with press and holdsequences of the button and are detailedbelow.

There is a difference between magnetic northand true north. The compass in the mirror cancompensate for this difference when it knowsthe Magnetic Zone in which it is operating. Thisis set either by the dealer or by the user. Theoperating Zone Numbers for North America areshown in the figure to the right.

Z-Nav™ Compass Display

The NVS™ Mirror in your vehicle is alsoequipped with a Z-Nav™ Compass that showsthe vehicle Compass heading in the DisplayWindow using the 8 basic cardinal headings (N,NE, E, SE, etc.).


81

To adjust the Zone setting:1. Determine the desired Zone Number based

upon your current location on the Zone Map.2. Press and hold the button for more than

3 but less than 6 seconds, the current ZoneNumber will appear on the display.

3. Pressing and holding the button againwill cause the numbers to increment (Note:they will repeat …13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …).Releasing the button when the desired ZoneNumber appears on the display will set thenew Zone.

4. Within about 5 seconds the compass willstart displaying a compass heading again.

There are some conditions that can causechanges to the vehicle magnets. Items such asinstalling a ski rack or a CB antenna or evensome body repair work on the vehicle cancause changes to the vehicle's magnetic field.In these situations, the compass will need to bere-calibrated to quickly correct for thesechanges. To re-calibrate the compass:1. Press and hold the button for more than

6 seconds. When the compass memory iscleared a "C" will appear in the display.

2. To calibrate the compass, drive the vehiclein 2 complete circles at less than 5 MPH (8Km/h).

B520C05NF


82

!Integrated HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem

The HomeLink® Wireless Control System pro-vides a convenient way to replace up to threehand-held radio-frequency (RF) transmitterswith a single built-in device. This innovativefeature will learn the radio frequency codes ofmost current transmitters to operate devicessuch as gate operators, garage door openers,entry door locks, security systems, even homelighting. Both standard and rolling code-equippedtransmitters can be programmed by followingthe outlined procedures. Additional HomeLink®

information can be found at: www.homelink.comor by calling 1-800-355-3515.

CAUTION:Before programming HomeLink® to a ga-rage door opener or gate operator, makesure that people and objects are out of theway of the device to prevent potential harmor damage. Do not use HomeLink® with anygarage door opener that lacks the safetystop and reverse features as required byU.S. federal safety standards (this includesany garage door opener model manufac-tured before April 1, 1982). A garage doorthat cannot detect an object - signaling thedoor to stop and reverse - does not meetcurrent U.S. federal safety standards. Usinga garage door opener without these fea-tures increases the risk of serious injury ordeath.

Programming HomeLink®

NOTE:o When programming a garage door

opener, it is advised to park the vehicleoutside of the garage.

o It is recommended that a new battery beplaced in the hand-held transmitter ofthe device being programmed toHomeLink® for quicker training and ac-curate transmission of the radio-fre-quency signal.

o Some vehicles may require the ignitionswitch to be turned to the second (or"accessories") position for program-ming and/or operation of HomeLink.

o In the event that there are still program-ming difficulties or questions after fol-lowing the programming steps listedbelow, contact HomeLink® at:www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

Retain the original transmitter of the RF deviceyou are programming for use in other vehiclesas well as for future HomeLink® programming.It is also suggested that upon the sale of thevehicle, the programmed HomeLink® buttonsbe erased for security purposes.


83

Standard Programming

To train most devices, follow these instructions:1. For first-time programming, press and hold

the two outside buttons, HomeLink® Channel1 and Channel 3 Buttons, until the indicatorlight begins to flash (after 20 seconds).Release both buttons. Do not hold the but-tons for longer than 30 seconds.

2. Position the end of your hand-held transmit-ter 1-3 inches (5-14 cm) away from theHomeLink® buttons while keeping the indica-tor light in view.

3. Simultaneously press and hold both theHomeLink® and hand-held transmitter but-ton. DO NOT release the buttons until step4 has been completed.

4. While continuing to hold the buttons the redIndicator Status LED will flash slowly andthen rapidly after HomeLink® successfullytrains to the frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release both buttons.

5. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink®

button and observe the red Status IndicatorLED. If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate when the HomeLink® buttonis pressed and released.

6. To program the remaining two HomeLink®

buttons, follow steps 2 through 5.

Rolling Code Programming

Rolling code devices which are "code-pro-tected" and manufactured after 1996 may bedetermined by the following:o Reference the device owner's manual for

verification.o The handheld transmitter appears to pro-

gram the HomeLink Universal Transceiverbut does not activate the device.

o Press and hold the trained HomeLink button.The device has the rolling code feature if theindicator light flashes rapidly and then turnssolid after 2 seconds.

To train rolling code devices, follow these in-structions:1. At the garage door opener receiver (motor-

head unit) in the garage, locate the "learn" or"smart" button. This can usually be foundwhere the hanging antenna wire is attachedto the motor-head unit. Exact location andcolor of the button may vary by garage dooropener brand. If there is difficulty locating thetraining button, reference the device owner'smanual or please visit our Web site atwww.homelink.com.

2. Firmly press and release the "learn" or"smart" button (which activates the "traininglight").

NOTE:There are 30 seconds in which to initiatestep3.

3. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, holdfor two seconds and then release the de-sired HomeLink® button. Repeat the "press/hold/release" sequence a second time tocomplete the programming. (Some devicesmay require you to repeat this sequence athird time to complete the programming.)


button and observe the red Status IndicatorLED. If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your deviceshould activate.

5. To program the remaining two HomeLink®

buttons, follow either steps 1 through 4above for other Rolling Code devices orsteps 2 through 5 in Standard Programmingfor standard devices.

Gate Operator & Canadian Programming

During programming, your handheld transmit-ter may automatically stop transmitting. Con-tinue to press the Integrated HomeLink® Wire-less Control System button (note steps 2 through4 in the Standard Programming portion of thisdocument) while you press and re-press("cycle") your handheld transmitter every twoseconds until the frequency signal has beenlearned. The indicator light will flash slowly and


84

!then rapidly after several seconds upon suc-cessful training.

Operating HomeLink®

To operate, simply press and release the pro-grammed HomeLink® button. Activation will nowoccur for the trained device (i.e. garage dooropener, gate operator, security system, entrydoor lock, home/office lighting, etc.). For con-venience, the hand-held transmitter of the de-vice may also be used at any time.

Reprogramming a Single HomeLink® But-ton

To program a new device to a previously trainedHomeLink® button, follow these steps:1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink® but-

ton. Do NOT release until step 4 has beencompleted.

2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly(after 20 seconds), position the handheldtransmitter 1 to 3 inches away from theHomeLink® surface.

3. Press and hold the handheld transmitterbutton. The HomeLink® indicator light willflash, first slowly and then rapidly.

4. When the indicator light begins to flash rap-idly, release both buttons.


button and observe the red Status IndicatorLED. If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and your newdevice should activate.

Erasing HomeLink® Buttons

Individual buttons cannot be erased. However,to erase all three programmed buttons:1. Press and hold the two outer HomeLink®

buttons until the indicator light begins toflash-after 20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons. Do not hold for longerthan 30 seconds.

The Integrated HomeLink® Wireless ControlSystem is now in the training (learn) mode andcan be programmed at any time following theappropriate steps in the Programming sectionsabove.

FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3

This device complies with Part 15 FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following two condi-tions: (1) this device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must acceptany interference received, including interfer-ence that may cause undesired operation.

WARNING:The transceiver has been tested and com-plies with FCC and Industry Canada rules.Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible for com-pliance could void the user's authority tooperate the device.

NVS® is a registered trademark and Z-Nav™ isa trademark of the Gentex Corporation, Zeeland,Michigan. HomeLink® is a registered trademarkowned by Johnson Controls, Incorporated,Milwaukee, Wisconsin.


85

! WARNING:The trunk lid should always be kept com-pletely closed while the vehicle is in motion.If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaustgases may enter the car and serious illnessor death may result. See additional warn-ings concerning exhaust gases on page 2-2.

B540B04Y-AAT

Trunk Lid Lock Knob

HNF2014-A

If the trunk lid lock knob (located near the latch)is in the "LOCK" position when the trunk lid isclosed, it will not be possible to open the trunk

PARKING BRAKE

B530A01A-AAT

Always engage the parking brake before leav-ing the vehicle. This also turns on the parkingbrake indicator light when the key is in the "ON"or "START" position. Before driving away, besure that the parking brake is fully released andthe indicator light is off.

o To engage the parking brake, pull the leverup as far as possible.

o To release the parking brake, pull up andpress the thumb button. Then, while holdingthe button in, lower the brake lever.

B530A01NF

TRUNK LID

B540A01S-GAT

Remote Trunk Lid Release

To open the trunk lid without using the key, pullup the lid release lever.To close, lower the trunk lid, then press downon it until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid issecurely fastened, always check by trying topull it up again.

B540A01NF


86

!

HNF2016

B540B02E-AAT

Trunk Lid Emergency Latch Release

Your vehicle is equipped with a glow-in-the darkemergency trunk release lever located insidethe trunk. It will glow after the trunk is closed.When pulled, this lever will release the trunklatch mechanism and open the trunk.

lid by using the remote release. In this instance,use the master key to unlock and open the trunklid.To allow the trunk lid to be opened with theremote release, push the trunk lid lock knobdown, then to the opposite direction of the"LOCK" position.

WARNING:Doors and trunk should be kept locked andkeys be kept out of the reach of children.Parents also should teach their childrenabout the dangers of playing in trunks.

! WARNING:o If a person is locked in the trunk, pull the

emergency trunk release lever on thedriver's side of the inside panel of thetrunk to open the trunk lid.

o HYUNDAI recommends that cars be keptlocked and keys be kept out of the reachof children, and that parents teach theirchildren about the dangers of playing intrunks.

o Parents should teach children about theemergency trunk release lever in theirvehicle and how to open the trunk lid ifthey are accidentally locked in the trunk.


87REMOTE FUEL-FILLER LID RELEASE

B560A03Y-AAT

The fuel-filler lid may be opened from inside thevehicle by pushing the fuel-filler lid opener switchlocated on the driver's door.

NOTE:If the fuel-filler lid will not open because icehas formed around it, tap lightly or push onthe lid to break the ice and release the lid. Donot pry on the lid. If necessary, spray aroundthe lid with an approved de-icer fluid (donot use radiator anti-freeze) or move thevehicle to a warm place and allow the ice tomelt.

B560A02NF

HNF2012

B540C01Y-AAT

To unlock using the key

To open the trunk lid, insert the key and turn itclockwise to unlock. The trunk compartmentlight illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.

HIGH-MOUNTED REAR STOP LIGHT

B550A02Y-AAT

In addition to the lower-mounted rear stop lightson either side of the car, the high mounted rearstop light in the center of the rear window alsolights when the brakes are applied.

B550A01NF


88

WARNING:o If you open the fuel filler cap during high

ambient temperatures, a slight "pres-sure sound" may be heard. This is nor-mal and not a cause for concern.Whenever you open the fuel filler cap,turn it slowly.

o Make sure the fuel filler cap is replacedand securely seated after fueling. Failureto replace or fully seat the fuel filler capwill result in fuel vapors escaping intothe atmosphere and the check engine" " indicator illuminating.

o Do not "TOP-OFF" after the first nozzleshut off when refueling.

o Automotive fuels are flammable/explo-sive materials. When refueling, pleasenote the following guidelines carefully.- Before touching the fuel nozzle or fuel

filler cap, have one's hands in contactwith metal parts away from the fillerneck to discharge static electricity.

!

! WARNING:o The fuel cap must be tightened until the

cap clicks, otherwise " " light willilluminate.

o Gasoline vapors are dangerous. Beforerefueling, always stop the engine andnever allow sparks or open flames nearthe filler area. If you need to replace thefiller cap, use a genuine Hyundai re-placement part.

HNF2021

! WARNING:- Do not get back in the vehicle while

refueling. Do not operate anything thatcan produce static electricity. Staticelectricity discharge can ignite fuelvapors resulting in an explosion.

- When using a portable fuel container,be sure to place the container on theground while refueling. Static electric-ity discharge from the container canignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Whilestarting refueling, contact should bemaintained until the filling is complete.

- Do not use cellular phones around agas station. The electric current or elec-tronic interference from cellular phonescan ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.

- When refueling, always turn the engineoff. Sparks by engine compartmentelectrical equipment can ignite fuelvapors causing a fire. After refueling,check to make sure the fuel filler cap issecurely closed, and then start theengine.

- Do not smoke or try to light cigarettesaround a gas station. Automotive fuelsare flammable.


89

!

3. Raise the hood by hand.

When closing the hood, slowly close the hoodand make sure it locks into place.

WARNING:o Always double check to be sure that the

hood is firmly latched before drivingaway. If it is not latched, the hood couldfly open while the vehicle is being driven,causing a total loss of visibility, whichmight result in an accident.

o Do not move the vehicle with the hoodin the raised position, as vision is ob-structed and the hood could fall or bedamaged.

B560B01L-GAT

Manual Fuel Filler Lid Release

If the fuel filler lid cannot be opened using theremote opener, a manual opener handle islocated inside the trunk on the left side. Open thefuel filler lid by pulling on this handle as shownin the illustration.

HNF2022

HOOD RELEASE

B570A01NF-GAT

1. Pull the release knob to unlatch the hood.

2. Pull the secondary latch up and lift the hood.

B570A01NF

HNF2024-E


90

!

SUN VISOR

B580A01NF-GAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with sun visors to givethe driver and front passenger either frontal orsideward shade. To reduce glare or to shut outdirect rays of the sun, turn the sun visor down.Vanity mirrors are provided on the back of thesun visor for the driver and front passenger.

NOTE:The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)label containing useful information can befound on the back of each sun visor.

B580A01NF

WARNING:Do not place the sun visor in such a mannerthat it obscures visibility of the roadway,traffic or other objects.

B500B01B-GAT

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automati-cally turn on the mirror light.

HNF2172

B580C01JM-AAT

Sun Visor Extender

Your vehicle is equipped with sun visor extend-ers that may be used when the visor is in the sideglass position.

B580C01NF


91

!

CAUTION:After adjusting the steering wheel, try mov-ing it up and down to make sure it is lockedin position.

!

WARNING:Do not attempt to adjust the steering wheelwhile driving as this may result in loss ofcontrol of the vehicle and serious injury ordeath.

B600B01NF-GAT

Tilt and telescopic type(If Installed)

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Push the lever downward fully to unlock.2. Adjust upward or downward and forward or

backward to set the steering wheel to thedesired position.

3. After adjustment, securely tighten the leverby pulling it upward.

B600B01NF-A

STEERING WHEEL

B600A01NF-GAT

Tilt type

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever toward you and hold it to unlock.2. Raise or lower the steering wheel to the

desired position.3. After adjustment, release the lever.

HNF2067


92 FRONT DOOR WARNINGLIGHT

B620A01S-AAT

A red light comes on when the front door isopened. The purpose of this light is to assistwhen you get in or out and also to warn passingvehicles.

B620A01NF

HORN

B610A01L-GAT

Press the pad on the steering wheel to sound thehorn.

B610A01NF

REAR SEAT ARMREST

B611A01Y-AAT

This armrest is located in the center of the rearseatback.

B611A01NF-A


93

NOTE:If the vehicle speed decreases more than9 mph (15 km/h) below the set speed ordecreases below 25 mph (40 km/h), thecruise control system will automaticallycancel the set speed.

CRUISE CONTROL

B660A01S-AAT

The cruise control system provides automaticspeed control for your comfort when driving onfreeways, tollroads, or other noncongestedhighways. This system is designed to functionabove approximately 25 mph (40 km/h).

B660B01NF-AAT

To Set the Cruise Speed

1. Push the cruise control ON/OFF switch.The "CRUISE" indicator light in the instru-ment cluster will illuminate. This turns thesystem on.

2. Accelerate to desired cruising speed above40 km/h (25 mph).

B660A01NF

B660B02NF

3. Push the "SET" (COAST) switch after youhave set the vehicle speed at the desiredspeed.If the "SET (COAST)" switch is selected, thecruise "SET" indicator light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate.

4. Remove your foot from the accelerator pedaland the desired speed will automatically bemaintained.

5. To increase speed, temporarily depress theaccelerator pedal enough for the vehicle toexceed the preset speed. When you removeyour foot from the accelerator pedal, thevehicle will return to the speed you have set.


94

B660E01NF-GAT

To Reset at a Faster Speed

1. Push the control switch "RESUME (ACCEL)"and hold it.

B660C01NF-AAT

To Cancel the Cruise Speed

To disengage the cruise control system, pushthe control switch "CANCEL".Additionally, the following actions will disengagethe system:

o Depress the brake pedal.o Depress the clutch pedal (Manual transaxle).o Shift the selector lever to "N" position (Auto-

matic transaxle).o Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the

memory speed by 9 mph (15 km/h).o Decrease the vehicle speed to less than 25

mph (40 km/h).o Release the cruise control ON/OFF switch.

B660C01NF

B660D01NF-AAT

To Resume the Preset Speed

The vehicle will automatically resume the speedset prior to cancellation when you push thecontrol switch "RESUME (ACCEL)" and re-lease it to return (when travelling above 25mph).If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" isselected, the cruise "SET" indicator in the in-strument cluster will illuminate.

B660D01NF

B660F01NF-GAT

To Reset at a Slower Speed

1. Push the control switch "SET (COAST)" andhold it. While the control switch is pushed, thevehicle speed will gradually decrease.If the "SET(COAST)" switch is selected, thecruise "SET" indicator light in the instrumentcluster will illuminate.

2. When the desired speed is obtained, releasethe control switch.

B660B02NF

If the control switch "RESUME(ACCEL)" isselected, the cruise "SET" indicator in theinstrument cluster will illuminate.

2. Accelerate to desired speed and release thecontrol switch. While the control switch isheld, the vehicle will gradually gain speed.


95

MUTE Switch

o Press the MUTE switch to slience the sound.o Once again press the MUTE switch to re-

store the sound.

VOL ( / ) Switch

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to increasevolume.

o Press the VOL ( ) switch to deceasevolume.

RADIO (FM1 → FM2 → AM) → CD → CDC

→!

AUDIO REMOTE CONTROLSWITCH

B610A01NF-AAT

(If Installed)

NOTE:Do not operate audio remote controlswitches simultaneously.

MODE Switch

Press the MODE switch to select Radio, CD(Compact Disc) and CDC (Compact DiscChanger).Each press of the switch changes the displayas follows:

B610A01NF-A

WARNING:o Keep the cruise control ON/OFF switch

off when not using the cruise control.o Use the cruise control system only when

traveling on open highways in goodweather.

o Do not use the cruise control when itmay not be safe to keep the car at aconstant speed, for instance, driving inheavy or varying traffic, or on slippery(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or windingroads or over 6% up-hill or down-hillroads.

o Pay particular attention to the drivingconditions whenever using the cruisecontrol system.

o During cruise-speed driving of a manualtransaxle vehicle, do not shift into neu-tral without depressing the clutch pedal,since the engine will be overrevved. Ifthis happens, depress the clutch pedalor release the cruise control ON/OFFswitch.

o During normal cruise control operation,when the "SET" switch is activated orreactivated after applying the brakes,the cruise control will energize after ap-proximately 3 seconds. This delay isnormal.


96 HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL

B710A01E-GAT

B710A01NF-A

B710B01NF-GAT

Center Ventilator/Side Ventilator

The center ventilators are located in the middleof the dashboard.The side ventilators are located on each side ofthe dashboard.To change the direction of the air flow, turn thecontrol knob under the vents.To control the amount of air, turn the controlknob on the left side of the vents. The vents areopened when the vent knob is moved to " "position. The vents are closed when the ventknob is moved to " ". Keep these vents clearof any obstructions.

1. Side Defroster Nozzle2. Side Ventilator3. Windshield Defroster Nozzle4. Center Ventilator


97

B670B02O-AAT

Fan Speed Control (Blower Control)

HEATING AND VENTILATION

B670A01NF-GAT

Rotary and Push Button Type

1. Temperature control2. Fan speed control3. Air flow control4. Air conditioning switch5. Air intake control6. Rear window defroster switch

This is used to select the blower fan speed.The blower fan speed, and therefore the volumeof air delivered from the system, may be con-trolled manually by setting the blower controlbetween the "1" and "4" position.1 is the lowest fan speed and 4 is the highest fanspeed.

HNF2118-A HNF2125-A

B670E01A-AAT

Temperature Control

This is used to turn the heating system on andoff and to select the degree of heating desired.

HNF2126

Cool Warm


98

B670D04O-AAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to turn the blower fan on/off and todirect the flow of air. Air can be directed to thefloor, dashboard outlets, or windshield. Fivesymbols are used to represent Face, Bi-Level,Floor, Floor-Defrost and Defrost air position.The MAX A/C mode is used to cool the inside ofthe vehicle faster. The "OFF" mode is used toturn the blower fan off.

Face-Level

Selecting the "Face" mode will cause air to bedischarged through the face level vents.

Bi-Level

Air is discharged through the face vents and thefloor vents. This makes it possible to havecooler air from the dashboard vents and warmerair from the floor outlets at the same time.

HNF2119-A

HNF2121HNF2120


99

Floor-Level

Air is discharged through the floor vents, wind-shield defroster nozzle, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.If the "Floor" mode is selected, the "Fresh"mode will be activated.

Floor-Defrost Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, the floor vents, side defrosternozzle and side ventilator.If the "Floor-Defrost" mode is selected, the A/Cwill turn on automatically and "Fresh" mode willbe activated.

HNF2124HNF2122 HNF2123

Defrost-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.If the "Defrost" mode is selected, the A/C will turnon automatically and "Fresh" mode will be ac-tivated to improve windshield defrosting.

NOTE:If the "Floor-Defrost" or "Defrost" mode isselected, the air conditioning will not turnoff by pushing the A/C button.


100

If the air flow control is set to the floor-defrost or the defrost mode, the A/C willturn on automatically but the A/C indicatorlight does not turn on. The A/C will not turnoff until the air flow control is set to theanother mode except the floor-defrost modeand the defrost mode.

MAX A/C-Level

Air is discharged through the face level vents.If the "MAX A/C" mode is selected, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Recirculation" modewill be activated.

B670D01NF-A

NOTE:o The air intake control switch will change

to " " mode when the ignition switchis turned "ON" with the MAX A/C modeselected.

o When you change to another mode fromMAX A/C, the A/C and the air intakecontrol switch are set as shown in thefollowing chart.

* The A/C or the air intake control switchreturns to its former setting.

A/C

ON

ON or OFF *

OFF

ON or OFF *

ON

ON

Air Intake

Control Switch

or *

OFFOFF-Level

Air is discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator.

NOTE:If the air flow control is off, the air intakecontrol is set to the fresh mode automati-cally.

B670D02NF-A


101

For normal heating operation, set the air flowcontrol to the floor ( ) position. (The "Fresh"mode will be activated.)

For faster heating, the air intake control switchshould be set in the recirculate ( ) position.

If the windows fog up, set the air flow control tothe defrost ( ) position (The A/C will turn onautomatically and "Fresh" mode will be acti-vated.)

For maximum heat, move the temperature con-trol to "Warm".

B670C02Y-AAT

Air Intake Control

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation of inside air.

FreshRecirculation

With the " " mode selected, air enters thevehicle from outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the other functions selected.With the " " mode selected, air from withinthe passenger compartment is drawn throughthe heating system and heated or cooled ac-cording to the other functions selected.

NOTE:o It should be noted that prolonged opera-

tion of the heating system in " " modewill give rise to fogging of the wind-shield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition prolonged useof the air conditioning with the " " modeselected may result in the air within thepassenger compartment becoming ex-cessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control switch will changeto " " mode in floor, floor-defrost anddefrost position. This is normal opera-tion. But, the air intake control switchwill change to " " mode when theignition switch is turned "ON" with theMAX A/C mode selected.

HNF2127-A

HEATING CONTROLS

B690A01O-AAT

B690A01NF-A


102 VENTILATION

B700A02A-AAT

BI-LEVEL HEATING

B710A01A-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with bi-level heatingcontrols. This makes it possible to have coolerair from the dashboard vents and warmer airfrom the floor outlets at the same time. To usethis feature:

o Set the air intake control switch to the freshair ( ) position.

o Set the air flow control at the bi-level ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B700A01NF-A

To operate the ventilation system:

o Set the air intake control to the fresh air ( )position.

o To direct all intake air to the dashboardvents, set the airflow control to the face ( )position.

o Adjust the fan speed control to the desiredspeed.

o Set the temperature control between "Cool"and "Warm".

B710A02NF-A

B730A01L-AAT

Operation Tips

o To keep dust or unpleasant fumes fromentering the car through the ventilation sys-tem, temporarily set the air intake control atthe position. Be sure to return the controlto the position when the irritation haspassed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. Thiswill help keep the driver alert and comfort-able.

o Air for the heating/cooling system is drawnin through the grilles just ahead of the wind-shield. Care should be taken that these arenot blocked by leaves, snow, ice or otherobstructions.

o To prevent interior fog on the windshield, setthe air intake control to the fresh air ( )position and fan speed to the desired posi-tion, turn on the air conditioning system, andadjust temperature control to desired tem-perature.


103AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

B740B03O-AAT

Air Conditioning OperationCooling

To use the air conditioning to cool the interior:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position.o Turn on the air conditioning switch by push-

ing in on the switch. The air conditioningindicator light should come on at the sametime.


B740A01S-AAT

Air Conditioning Switch(If Installed)

The air conditioning is turned on or off bypushing the A/C button on the heating/air con-ditioning control panel.

HNF2128-A B740B01NF-A

o Set the temperature control to "Cool". ("Cool"provides maximum cooling. The tempera-ture may be moderated by moving the con-trol toward "Warm".)

o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.For greater cooling, turn the fan control toone of the higher speeds or temporarilyselect the recirculate ( ) position on theair intake control.


104

B740C02O-AAT

De-Humidified Heating

For dehumidified heating:

o Set the air flow control to the face ( ) position.o Turn on the air conditioning switch. The air

conditioning indicator light should come on atthe same time.


o Adjust the fan control to the desired speed.o For more rapid action, set the fan at one of

the higher speeds.o Adjust the temperature control to provide the

desired amount of warmth.

B740C01NF-A

B740D02Y-AAT

Operation Tips

o If the interior of the car is hot when you firstget in, open the windows for a few minutesto expel the hot air.

o When you are using the air conditioningsystem, keep all windows closed to keep hotair out.

o When moving slowly, as in heavy traffic, shiftto a lower gear. This increases engine speed,which in turn increases the speed of the airconditioning compressor.

o On steep grades, turn the air conditioning offto avoid the possibility of the engine over-heating.

o During winter months or in periods when theair conditioning is not used regularly, run theair conditioning once every month for a fewminutes. This will help circulate the lubri-cants and keep your system in peak oper-ating condition.


105DEFROSTING/DEFOGGING

B720A02E-AAT

Use the heating/ventilation system to defrost or defog thewindshield:

To remove interior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to the desired position.o Set the fan speed control between "1" and "4" position.

To remove frost or exterior fog on the windshield;o Set the air flow control to the defrost ( ) position. (The

A/C will turn on automatically and the "Fresh" mode will beactivated.)

o Set the temperature control to warm.o Set the fan speed control to position "3" or "4".

NOTE:When the A/C is operated continuously on the floor-defrost level ( ) or defrost level ( ), it may cause fog to formon the exterior windshield. If this occurs, set the air flow control to the face level position ( ) and fan speed controlto the low position.

B720A01NF-A B720A02NF-A

Manual A/C Automatic A/C Manual A/C Automatic A/C


106 AUTOMATIC HEATING AND COOLING CONTROL SYSTEM

B970A01Y-AAT

(If lnstalled)

Your Hyundai is equipped with an automaticheating and cooling control system controlledby simply setting the desired temperature.

B970B01NF-GAT

Heating and Cooling Controls

1. Temperature Control2. Defroster Switch3. Display Window4. Rear Window Defroster Switch5. Blower Fan Control6. AUTO (Automatic Control) Switch7. Air Flow Control Switch8. Air Conditioning Switch9. Air lntake Control Switch10. Air Quality System Switch

(If Installed)11. OFF Switch

TYPE B (With Air Quality System)

B970B01NF

B970B02NF

TYPE A (Without Air Quality System)


107

B970C01NF-AAT

Automatic Operation

The FATC (Full Automatic Temperature Con-trol) system automatically controls heating andcooling as follows:

1. Push the "AUTO" switch. The indicator lightwill illuminate confirming that the Face, Floorand/or Bi-Level modes as well as the blowerspeed and air conditioner will be controlledautomatically.And, the air conditioning will operate if ambi-ent temperature is higher than 34.7°F(1.5°C)and automatically turns off if the ambienttemperature drops below 33.08°F(0.6°C).

2. Turn the "TEMP" knob to set the desiredtemperature.The temperature will increase to the maxi-mum "HI" by turning the knob clockwise.The temperature will decrease to the mini-mum "LO" by turning the knob counter-clockwise.

NOTE:If the battery has been discharged or dis-connected, the temperature mode will resetto Centigrade degrees.This is a normal condition and you canchange the temperature mode from Centi-grade to Fahrenheit as follows;Press the "OFF" and "AUTO " button simul-taneously for 3 seconds.The display shows that the unit of tempera-ture is adjusted to Centigrade or Fahrenheit(°C →→→→→ °F or °F →→→→→ °C).

HNF2135

HNF2137

B970C01NF-A

Photo Sensor

NOTE:Never place anything over the sensor whichis located on the instrument panel to en-sure better control of the heating and cool-ing system.


108

B980B01NF-GAT

Fan Speed Control

The fan speed can be set to the desired speedby turning the fan speed control knob. Thehigher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered.Pressing the "OFF" button turns off the fan.

HNF2133

B980A01Y-AAT

MANUAL OPERATION

The heating and cooling system can be con-trolled manually as well by pushing buttonsother than the "AUTO" button. In this state, thesystem sequentially works according to theorder of buttons selected.The function of the buttons which are not se-lected will be controlled automatically.Press the "AUTO" button in order to convert toautomatic control of the system.

B670C02Y-AAT

Air Intake Control Switch (Without A.Q.S)

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculation of inside air.To change the air intake control mode (Freshmode, Recirculation mode), push the controlbutton.

FRESH MODE ( ) : The indicator light onthe button goes on when the air intake controlis in fresh mode.

RECIRCULATION MODE ( ) : The indicatorlight on the button is illuminated when the airintake control is in recirculation mode.

HNF2139


109

With the "Fresh" mode selected, air enters thevehicle from the outside and is heated or cooledaccording to the function selected.

With the "Recirculation" mode selected, air fromwithin the passenger compartment will be drawnthrough the heating system and heated orcooled according to the function selected.


tion of the heating system in "recircula-tion" mode will give rise to fogging of thewindshield and side windows and the airwithin the passenger compartment willbecome stale. In addition, prolongeduse of the air conditioning with the "Re-circulation" mode selected may result inthe air within the passenger compart-ment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON"the air intake control will change to " "mode (regardless of switch position).This is normal operation. The air intakecontrol operates in "AUTO" mode whenturning the ignition to the ON position ifthe "AUTO" mode was used before shut-ting off the engine.

Recirculation mode :

Air from witin the passenger compartment willbe drawn through the heating system and heatedor cooled according to the function selected.

Exhaust gas cutoff mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside.But if exhaust gas enters the vehicle from theoutside, the exhaust gas cutoff mode ( ) isautomatically converted to the ( ) mode, toprevent exhaust gas from entering the vehicle.


tion of the heating system in recircula-tion mode ( ) will give rise to mistingof the windshield and side windows andthe air within the passenger compart-ment will become stale. In addition, pro-longed use of the air conditioning withthe recirculation mode ( ) sele-ctedmay result in the air within the passengercompartment becoming excessively dry.

o When the ignition switch is turned "ON",the air intake control will change to"Fresh" mode (regardless of switch po-sition). This is normal operation. The airintake control operates in "AUTO" modewhen turning the ignition to the ONposition if the "AUTO" mode was usedbefore shutting off the engine.

B980C03Y-GAT

Air Intake Control Switch(With A.Q.S) (If Installed)

This is used to select fresh outside air orrecirculate inside air automatically.

: OFF: ON

Fresh mode :

Air enters the vehicle from the outside and isheated or cooled according to the functionselected.

HNF2139-1


110

Face-Level

When selecting the "Face-Level" mode, theindicator light will come on, causing air to bedischarged through the face level vents.

HNF2120

B980D01Y-AAT

Heating and Cooling System Off

Press the "OFF" button to stop the operation ofthe heating and cooling system.

HNF2143

B980E01NF-GAT

Air Flow Control

This is used to direct the flow of air. Air can bedirected to the floor, dashboard outlets, orwindshield. Four symbols are used to representFace, Bi-Level, Floor, Floor-Defrost position.

B980E01NF-A

! CAUTION:If the windows fog up with the Recircula-tion or A.Q.S mode selected, set the airintake control to the Fresh air position orA.Q.S control to "OFF".


111

HNF2122

Floor-Level

When selecting the "Floor-Level", the indicatorlight will come on and the air will be dischargedthrough the floor vents, windsheld defrosternozzle, side defroster nozzle and side ventila-tor.

Bi-Level

When selecting the "Bi-Level", the indicator lightwill come on and the air will be dischargedthrough the face vents and the floor vents. Thismakes it possible to have cooler air from thedashboard vents and warmer air from the flooroutlets at the same time.

HNF2121

Floor-Defrost Level

When selecting the "Floor-Defrost" mode, theindicator light will come on and the air will bedischarged through the windshield defrosternozzle, the floor vents, side defroster nozzleand side ventilator.If any of the temperature control switch, theblower fan control switch, or the defrost switchis selected in "Floor-Defrost" mode, the A/C willturn on automatically and "Fresh" mode will beactivated.

HNF2123


112

B760A01NF-AAT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOREVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)(If Installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in the rightside of the instrument panel.It operates to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.To replace the air conditioner filter, refer to page6-22.

HNF2181

Inside ofa vehicle

Evaporator coreFilterBlower

Outside air

Inside air

CAUTION:o Replace the filter every 10,000 miles

(15,000 km) or once a year.If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions such as dusty, rough roads, morefrequent air conditioner filter inspec-tions and changes are required.

o When the air flow rate is suddenly de-creased, it must be checked at an autho-rized dealer.

!

B980F01NF-AAT

Defrost Switch

When the "Defrost" button is pressed, the " "mode will be automatically selected and the airwill be discharged through the windshield de-froster nozzle, side defroster nozzle and sideventilator. To assist in defrosting, the air condi-tioning will operate if ambient temperature ishigher than 34.7°F(1.5°C) and automaticallyturns off if the ambient temperature drops below33.08°F(0.6°C).

B980F01NF-A

B980G01NF-AAT

Auto De-humidified Control(If Installed)

There is a humidity sensor in the middle of theinstrument panel. If it is very humid inside thecar, the air conditioning is turned on automati-cally to control the humidity.


113STEREO SOUND SYSTEM

B750A02A-AAT

How Car Audio Works

AM broadcasts can be received at greaterdistances than FM broadcasts. This is becauseAM radio waves are transmitted at low frequen-cies. These long, low frequency radio wavescan follow the curvature of the earth rather thantravelling straight out into the atmosphere. Inaddition, they curve around obstructions so thatthey can provide better signal coverage.

AM and FM radio signals are broadcast fromtransmitter towers located around your city.They are intercepted by the radio antenna onyour car. This signal is then received by theradio and sent to your car speakers.When a strong radio signal has reached yourvehicle, the precise engineering of your audiosystem ensures the best possible quality repro-duction. However, in some cases the signalcoming to your vehicle may not be strong andclear. This can be due to factors such as thedistance from the radio station, closeness ofother strong radio stations or the presence ofbuildings, bridges or other large obstructions inthe area.

FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequen-cies and do not bend to follow the earth'ssurface. Because of this, FM broadcasts gen-erally begin to fade at short distances from thestation. Also, FM signals are easily affected bybuildings, mountains, or other obstructions.These can result in certain listening conditionswhich might lead you to believe a problem existswith your radio. The following conditions arenormal and do not indicate radio trouble:

Ionosphere

B750A02L

AM reception

Mountains

Buildings

Unobstructedarea

FM radio station

B750A03L

Ionosphere

FM reception

B750A01L

Obstructed areaIron bridges


114

!

o Fading - As your car moves away from theradio station, the signal will weaken andsound will begin to fade. When this occurs,we suggest that you select another strongerstation.

o Flutter/Static - Weak FM signals or largeobstructions between the transmitter andyour radio can disturb the signal causingstatic or fluttering noises to occur. Reducingthe treble level may lessen this effect until thedisturbance clears.

o Station Swapping - As an FM signal weak-ens, another more powerful signal near thesame frequency may begin to play. This isbecause your radio is designed to lock ontothe clearest signal. If this occurs, selectanother station with a stronger signal.

o Multi-Path Cancellation - Radio signals beingreceived from several directions can causedistortion or fluttering. This can be caused bya direct and reflected signal from the samestation, or by signals from two stations withclose frequencies. If this occurs, selectanother station until the condition has passed.

B750B04Y-AAT

Using a cellular phone or a two-way radio

When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle,noise may be produced from the audio equip-ment. This does not mean that something iswrong with the audio equipment. In such a case,use the cellular phone at a place as far aspossible from the audio equipment.

WARNING:Don't use a cellular phone when you aredriving. This could result in loss of control,and an accident that may cause death,serious injury, or property damage. Youmust stop at a safe place to use a cellularphone.

B750A04L B750A05L


115AUDIO SYSTEM

V480A01NF-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (V480) (If Installed)

V480A01NF1. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Selector

3. Tune/Adjustment Mode Select Knob

4. SEEK Operation

5. SCAN Button

6. PRESET STATION SELECT Buttons

7. EQ Button


116

V480B01NF-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME ControlKnob

Press the PUSH PWR Control Knob to turn theaudio system on or off.Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise todecrease the volume.If the volume is set above a certain level and theignition is turned off, the volume will come backon at a "nominal" listening level when the ignitionswitch is turned back on.

2. BAND Selector

The AM/FM select control works in radio andCD mode.

o AM/FM select in radio mode

This control allows you to select AM or FMfrequency bands. Press the button to switchbetween FM1, FM2 and AM memory presetstations.

o AM/FM select in CD mode

Press this button to stop CD play and begin radioplay.

3. Tune(manual) / Adjustment Mode Se-lect Knob

o Rotate counterclockwise to the next fre-quency down the band (whether or not alistenable station is located there).

o Rotate clockwise to move to the next fre-quency up the band (whether or not a listen-able station is located there).

Adjustment Mode Select

Pressing the AUDIO SEL knob will initiate AudioMode. Each subsequent press will select thenext adjustment in the following order:

1) Bass adjustThe bass adjust control allows you to in-crease or decrease the audio system'sbass output. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob tochange the bass setting.

2) Midrange adjustThe midrange adjust control allows you toincrease or decrease the audio system'smidrange output. Rotate the AUDIO SELknob to change the midrange setting.

3) Treble adjustThe treble adjust control allows you to in-crease or decrease the audio system'streble output. Rotate the AUDIO SEL knob tochange the treble setting.

4) Speaker balance adjustSpeaker sound distribution can be adjustedbetween the right and left speakers by rotat-ing the AUDIO SEL knob.

5) Speaker fade adjustSpeaker sound can be adjusted between thefront and rear speakers by rotating theAUDIO SEL knob.

4. SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

o Press (down arrow) to find the nextlistenable station down the frequency band.SEEK DOWN will display.

o Press (up arrow) to find the next listenablestation up the frequency band. SEEK UP willdisplay.

5. SCAN Button

Press the SCAN button to hear a brief samplingof all listenable stations on the frequency band.Press the SCAN button again to stop the scanmode.


117


The radio is equipped with six preset stationmemory controls. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12preset FM stations (six in AM, six in FM1, six inFM2). There are a total possible of 18 presetstations.

Setting memory preset stations

o Select the frequency band with the BANDselector. Press the AM/FM control to togglebetween AM, FM1, or FM2.

o Press the SEEK control to access the nextlistenable station up or down the frequencyband. Rotate the TUNE control to go up ordown the listening band in individual incre-ments.

o Select a station.o Press and hold a memory preset control.

You will hear a beep and the station is heldin memory on the control you selected.

7. EQ Button- Equalization Feature

The radio has five EQ modes: OFF, CLASSI-CAL, POP, ROCK, and JAZZ.Each press of the EQ button will advance to thenext EQ setting. Radio and CD have indepen-dent EQ settings.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.

o Do not impact or strike the audio system,or the playback mechanism could bedamaged.

!


118

V480C01NF-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (V480) (If Installed) - Compatiable with MP3

V480C01NF

1. AUDIO/MP3 CD Select Button

2. TRACK UP/DOWN

3. SCAN Button

4. FF/REV Button

5. REPEAT(RPT) /RANDOM Button

6.CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR)

7. TEXT/EQ Button

8. Adjustment Mode Select Knob

9. CD EJECT


119

V480C01NF-AAT


CD mode may be entered by pressing the CDbutton and then loading a CD into the audiosystem. The first track of the disc will beginplaying. After that, the CD play will begin whereit stopped last.

NO CD will display if the CD control is activatedwhen there is not a CD present in the audiosystem.

NOTE:o Do not apply paper, tape, etc., onto the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

o The unit cannot play a CD-R(RecordableCD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that isnot finalized. Please refer to the manualof the CD-R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RW software for more informationon the finalization process.

o Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be play-able on this unit.

2. TRACK UP/DOWN

o Press (down arrow) to revert to theprevious track of the current disc. If thebeginning of the disc is reached, the CDplayer seeks to the beginning of the last trackon the current disc and begins playing.

o Press (up arrow) to advance to the nexttrack of the current disc. After the last trackhas been completed, the first track of thecurrent disc will automatically replay.

3. SCAN Button

Press the SCAN button to hear a short samplingof all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in aforward direction, wrapping back to the firsttrack at the end of the CD.) To stop on aparticular selection, press the button again.

4. FF/REV

o Press and hold the FF button until the desiredselection is reached. Release the button todisengage fast forward mode. When in fastforward mode, your audio system will auto-matically lower the volume level of the play-ing media.

o Press and hold the REV button until thedesired selection is reached. If the beginningof the disc is reached, the CD will begin playat the first track. Release the button todisengage reverse mode. When in reversemode, your audio system will automaticallylower the volume level of the playing media.

5. REPEAT(RPT)

When engaged, the repeat feature has threedifferent modes: RPT Track, RPT DIR, RPTOFF.RPT Track will continuously play the currenttrack selected. RPT DIR will continuously playthe current MP3 directory.o Press the RPT control until the desired

repeat mode is displayed. The audio systemwill then engage the desired repeat mode.

RANDOM(RND)

When engaged, the random feature has threedifferent modes: Random Disc, Random Direc-tory (MP3 only), and Random Off.RANDOM DISC randomly plays tracks fromthe disc presently in the audio system. RAN-DOM DIRECTORY plays all the tracks on thecurrent MP3 directory in random order.


120

o Press the RND button until the desired shufflemode is displayed. The audio system willthen engage the desired random mode.

6. CHANGE DIRECTORY(DIR)

Press DIR control to change MP3 directories.

7. MP3 TEXT mode

Each press of the TEXT button will advancethrough the following MP3 track information:

1) Filename2) Song Title3) Artist Name4) Album Name5) Directory Name6) Number of tracks on the current disc

Rotate the AUDIO-SEL knob to view additionalcharacters.

EQ Button - Equalization Feature

The Compact disc player has five EQ modes:OFF, CLASSICAL (CLAS), POP, ROCK, andJAZZ.Each press of the EQ button will advance to thenext EQ setting. Radio and CD have indepen-dent EQ settings.








9. CD EJECTo Press the EJ button to stop and eject a CD.

If a CD is ejected and not removed, the playerwill automatically reload the CD. This featuremay be used when the ignition is ON or OFF.

NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.


121

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.


o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc. Do not use theaudio system off-road as the discs couldbe scratched and damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause poor disc scratching tooccur or damage the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc player,professionally recorded CDs are recom-mended.


122

V490A01NF-AAT

STEREO RADIO OPERATION (V490) (If Installed)

V490A01NF

1. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME Control Knob

2. BAND Selector

3. Tune/AdjustmentMode Select Knob

4. SEEK Button

5. SCAN/EQ Button



123

V490B01NF-AAT

1. POWER ON-OFF / VOLUME ControlKnob

Press the PUSH PWR Control Knob to turn theaudio system on or off.Rotate the knob clockwise to increase thevolume and turn the knob counterclockwise todecrease the volume.If the volume is set above a certain level and theignition is turned off, the volume will come backon at a "nominal" listening level when the ignitionswitch is turned back on.

2. BAND Selector

The AM/FM select control works in radio andCD modes.

o AM/FM select in radio mode

This control allows you to select AM or FMfrequency bands. Press the button to switchbetween FM1, FM2 and AM memory presetstations.

o AM/FM select in CD mode

Press this button to stop CD play and begin radioplay.

3. Tune(manual) / Adjustment Mode Se-lect Knob

o Rotate counterclockwise to the next fre-quency down the band (whether or not alistenable station is located there).

o Rotate clockwise to move to the next fre-quency up the band (whether or not a listen-able station is located there).

Adjustment Mode Select






5) Speaker fade adjustSpeaker sound can be adjusted betweenthe front and rear speakers by rotating theAUDIO SEL knob.

4. SEEK Operation(Automatic Channel Selection)

o Press (down arrow) to find the nextlistenable station down the frequency band.SEEK DOWN will display.

o Press (up arrow) to find the next listenablestation up the frequency band. SEEK UP willdisplay.

5. SCAN EQ Button

Press the SCAN button to hear a brief samplingof all listenable stations on the frequency band.Press the SCAN button again to stop the scanmode.


124

EQ Button- Equalization Feature



The radio is equipped with six preset stationmemory controls. These buttons can be usedto select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12preset FM stations (six in AM, six in FM1, six inFM2). There are a total possible of 18 presetstations.

Setting memory preset stations

o Select the frequency band with the BANDselector. Press the AM/ FM control to togglebetween AM, FM1, or FM2.

o Press the SEEK control to access the nextlistenable station up or down the frequencyband. Rotate the TUNE control to go up ordown the listening band in individual incre-ments.

o Select a station.o Press and hold a memory preset control.

You will hear a beep and the station is heldin memory on the control you selected.

CAUTION:o Do not place beverages close to the

audio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.


!


125

V490C01NF-AAT

COMPACT DISC PLAYER OPERATION (V490) (If Installed) - Compatiable with MP3

V490C01NF


3. DISC Select Button

4. TRACK UP/DOWN

5. SCAN /EQ Button

2. LOAD Button 6. CD EJECT

7. FF/REV

8. REPEAT(RPT)/RANDOM Button


10.MP3 TEXT mode

11.Adjustment Mode Select Knob


126

V490D01NF-AAT


CD mode may be entered by pressing the CDbutton and then loading a CD into the audiosystem. The first track of the disc will beginplaying. After that, the CD play will begin whereit stopped last.If an alternative CD is desired, press the corre-sponding preset control (1- 6) of a loaded CD,or press the DISC control to access the otherloaded CDs.NO CD will display if the CD control is activatedwhen there is not a CD present in the audiosystem. If the CD control is pressed followed bya preset number, and that particular slot isempty, NO CD will display and the system willbegin to play the next available disc.

NOTE:o Do not apply paper, tape, etc., onto the

label side or the recording side of anydiscs, as it may cause a malfunction.

o The unit cannot play a CD-R(RecordableCD) and CD-RW(Rewritable CD) that isnot finalized. Please refer to the manualof the CD-R/CD-RW recorder or CD-R/CD-RW software for more informationon the finalization process.

o Depending on the recording status,some CD-Rs/CD-RWs may not be play-able on this unit.

2. LOAD Button

The load feature allows you to load single CDsinto the player internal to the audio.

o Press the LOAD button. Wait until the CDdisplays the insert CD message.

o Load the CD into the player.

Autoload

This feature allows you to azzutoload up to sixdiscs into the multi-disc CD player internal to theaudio.o Press and hold the LOAD button until

AUTOLOAD# is displayed.o Load the desired discs, one at a time. The CD

is loaded into position and the audio systemwill display CD#. Each time the audio is readyfor another CD, AUTOLOADING DISCSLOT# message will be displayed. The playerwill move to the next slot after each disc hasbeen loaded. The process is repeated untilall six slots are full.

The audio system plays the last CD loaded andthe display is updated. If some slots are alreadyfull and autoload is activated, the system will fillall empty slots.

NOTE:o This CD player is suitable only for 4.7

inch discs, do not use irregular shapedCDs.

o The disc player holds up to six discs. Donot try to load more than six.

o This six-disc CD player is equipped witha CD door.Compact discs should only be insertedinto the player after the door has opened.Do not attempt to force the door open.Compact discs should only be loaded bypressing the LOAD control.

3. DISC Select Button

o Press (left arrow) to select the previousdisc. (Play will begin on the first track of thedisc unless shuffle mode is engaged.) Holdthe button to continue reversing through thediscs.

o Press (right arrow) to select the next disc.Hold the button to fast-forward through theremaining discs.


127

Display description

There are six CD slots in the audio system.When a disc is loaded into a particular slot (1-6), the number of a loaded slot is displayed bya circle to indicate the currently selected CD.

4. TRACK UP/DOWN

o Press (down arrow) to revert to theprevious track of the current disc. If thebeginning of the disc is reached, the CDplayer seeks to the beginning of the lasttrack on the current disc and begins playing.

o Press (up arrow) to advance to the nexttrack of the current disc. After the last trackhas been completed, the first track of thecurrent disc will automatically replay.

5. SCAN /EQ Button

Press the SCAN button to hear a short samplingof all selections on the CD. (The CD scans in aforward direction, wrapping back to the firsttrack at the end of the CD.) To stop on aparticular selection, press the button again.

EQ Button - Equalization Feature


6. CD EJECTo Press the EJ button to stop and eject a CD.If a CD is ejected and not removed, the playerwill automatically reload the CD. This featuremay be used when the ignition is ON or OFF.

Auto eject

o Press and momentarily hold the EJ button toengage auto eject. All CDs which are presentin the player will be ejected one at a time. Ifa CD is ejected and not removed, the playerwill automatically reload the CD. This featuremay be used when the ignition is ON or OFF.

7. FF/REV

o Press and hold the FF button until the desiredselection is reached. If the end of the disc isreached, the CD will return to the first trackon the first disc. Release the button to disen-gage fast forward mode. When in fast for-ward mode, your audio system will automati-cally lower the volume level of the playingmedia.

o Press and hold the REV button until thedesired selection is reached. If the beginningof the disc is reached, the CD will begin playat the first track. Release the button todisengage reverse mode. When in reversemode, your audio system will automaticallylower the volume level of the playing media.

8. REPEAT(RPT)

When engaged, the repeat feature has threedifferent modes: RPT Track, RPT DIR, RPTOFF.RPT Track will continuously play the currenttrack selected. RPT DIR will continuously playthe current MP3 directory.o Press the RPT control until the desired

repeat mode is displayed. The audio systemwill then engage the desired repeat mode.


128

RANDOM(RND)

When engaged, the random feature has threedifferent modes: Random Disc, Random Di-rectory (MP3 only), and Random Off.RANDOM DISC randomly plays tracks fromthe disc presently in the audio system. RAN-DOM DIRECTORY plays all the tracks on thecurrent MP3 directory in random order.o Press the RND control until the desired

shuffle mode is displayed. The audio sys-tem will then engage the desired randommode.


Press DIR control to change MP3 directories.

10. MP3 TEXT mode

Each press of the TEXT button will advancethrough the following MP3 track information:1) Song Title2) Artist Name3) Album Name4) Filename5) Directory Name6) Number of tracks on the current disc

Rotate the AUDIO-SEL knob to view additionalcharacters.


Pressing the AUDIO SEL knob will initiate AudioMode. Each subsequent press will select thenext adjustment in the following order.






NOTE:o To assure proper operation of the unit,

keep the vehicle interior temperaturewithin a normal range by using thevehicle's air conditioning or heatingsystem.

o When replacing the fuse, replace it witha fuse having the correct capacity.

o This equipment is designed to be usedonly in a 12 volt DC battery system withnegative ground.

o This unit is made of precision parts. Donot attempt to disassemble or adjustany parts.

o When driving your vehicle, be sure tokeep the volume of the unit set lowenough to allow you to hear soundscoming from the outside.

o Do not expose this equipment (includ-ing the speakers) to water or excessivemoisture.


129

! CAUTION:o Do not insert warped or poor quality

discs into the CD player as damage to theunit may occur.

o Do not insert anything like coins into theplayer slot as damage to the unit mayoccur.

o Do not place beverages close to theaudio system. The playback mechanismmay be damaged if you spill them.


o Driving off-road or other vibrations mayskip your compact disc. Do not use theaudio system off-road as the discs couldbe scratched and damaged.

o Do not grip or pull out the disc with yourhand while the disc is being pulled intothe unit by the self loading mechanism.These can cause disc scratching to oc-cur or damage the compact disc player.

o Avoid using CD-Recordable or CDRewritable to ensure proper operation.When using the compact disc player,professionally recorded CDs are recom-mended.


130 ANTENNA

B870D01Y-AAT

Glass Antenna

When the radio power switch is turned on whilethe ignition key is in either the "ON" or "ACC"position, your car will receive both AM and FMbroadcast signals through the antenna in therear window glass.

HNF2189

CARE OF DISCS

B850A02L

B850A02F-AAT

Proper HandlingStorage

When not in use, place your discs in theirindividual case and store them in a cool placeaway from the sun, heat, and dust.Do not grip or pull out the disc with your handwhile the disc is being pulled into the unit by theself loading mechanism.

Keep Your Discs Clean

Handle your disc as shown. Do not drop thedisc. Hold the disc so you will not leave finger-prints on the surface. If the surface is scratched,it may cause the pickup to skip signal tracks. Donot affix tape, paper, or gummed labels on thedisc. Do not write on the disc.

Damaged Disc

Do not attempt to play damaged, warped orcracked discs. These could severely damagethe playback mechanism.

Fingerprints, dust, or soil on the surface of a disccould cause the pickup to skip signal tracks.Wipe the surface clean with a clean soft cloth.If the surface is heavily soiled, dampen a cleansoft cloth in a solution of mild neutral detergentto wipe it clean. See drawing.

B850A01L


131

CAUTION:o Do not clean the inner side of the rear

window glass with an abrasive type ofglass cleaner or use a scraper to removeforeign deposits from the inner surfaceof the glass as this may cause damage tothe antenna elements.

o Avoid adding metallic coatings to therear window glass, such as Ni, Cd, etc.These can disturb receiving AM and FMbroadcast signals.

!

DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................ 2-2Before Starting the Engine ............................................ 2-3Key Positions................................................................ 2-3Starting ......................................................................... 2-4Operating the Manual Transaxle .................................. 2-5Automatic Transaxle ..................................................... 2-8Power Adjustable Pedals .............................................2-11Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................................2-12Electronic Stability Control (ESC) System ..................2-13Good Braking Practices ..............................................2-14Driving for Economy ....................................................2-15Smooth Cornering ........................................................2-16Winter Driving ..............................................................2-16Trailer or Vehicle Towing .............................................2-19Vehicle Load Limit ........................................................2-22

2

2 DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

2

WARNING: ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS!C010A03A-AAT

Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately.

o Do not inhale exhaust fumes.Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyxiation.

o Be sure the exhaust system does not leak.The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a changein the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the car, have the exhaust system checkedas soon as possible by your Hyundai dealer.

o Do not run the engine in an enclosed area.Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garageany longer than it takes to start the engine and back the car out.

o Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the car.If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the car, be sure to do so only in an open area with the airintake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interior.

If you must drive with the trunk lid open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary:

1. Close all windows.2. Open side vents.3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds.

To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the windshield are kept clearof snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions.

!

! PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Engine exhaust and a wide variety of automobile components and parts, including components found in the interior furnishingsin a vehicle, contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects and reproductive harm.In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known tothe State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

2DRIVING YOUR HYUNDAI

3BEFORE STARTINGTHE ENGINE

C020A01A-AAT

Before you start the engine, you should always:

1. Look around the vehicle to be sure there areno flat tires, puddles of oil, water or otherindications of possible trouble.

2. After entering the car, check to be sure theparking brake is engaged.

3. Check that all windows and lights are clean.4. Check that the interior and exterior mirrors

are clean and in position.5. Check your seat, seatback and headrest to

be sure they are in their proper positions.6. Lock all the doors.7. Fasten your seat belt and be sure that all

other occupants have fastened theirs.8. Turn off all lights and accessories that are

not needed.9. When you turn the ignition switch to "ON",

check that all appropriate warning lights areoperating and that you have sufficient fuel.

10. Check the operation of warning lights and allbulbs when key is in the "ON" position.

TO START THE ENGINE

C030A01E-AAT

COMBINATION IGNITION SWITCH

o If your Hyundai is equipped with a manualtransaxle, place the shift lever in neutral anddepress the clutch pedal fully.

o If your Hyundai has an automatic transaxle,place the shift lever in "P" (park).

o To start the engine, insert the ignition key andturn it to the "START" position. Release it assoon as the engine starts. Do not hold thekey in the "START" position for more that 15seconds.

NOTE:o For safety, the engine will not start if the

clutch pedal is not depressed fully(Manual Transaxle) or the shift lever isnot in "P" or "N" Position (AutomaticTransaxle).

o The ignition key cannot be turned from"ACC" position to "LOCK" position un-less the shift lever is in the "P" (Park)position or the negative battery terminalis disconnected from the battery. Toremove the key, always confirm that theshift lever is securely positioned in "P"(Park) (For Automatic Transaxle).

o For additional information about start-ing, see page 2-4.

KEY POSITIONS

C040A01A-AAT

CAUTION:The engine should not be turned off or thekey removed from the ignition key cylinderwhile the car is in motion. The steeringwheel is locked by removing the key.

C040A01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START

!

o "START"

The engine is started in this position. It will crankuntil you release the key.


4

NOTE:Do not hold the key in the "START" positionfor more than 15 seconds.

o "ON"

When the key is in the "ON" position, the ignitionis on and all accessories may be turned on. Ifthe engine is not running, the key should not beleft in the "ON" position. This will discharge thebattery and may also damage the ignition sys-tem.

o "ACC"With the key in the "ACC" position, some elec-trical accessories (radio, etc.) may be oper-ated.

o "LOCK"The key can be removed or inserted in thisposition.To protect against theft, the steering wheellocks by removing the key.

NOTE:To unlock the steering wheel, insert the key,and then turn the steering wheel and keysimultaneously.

STARTING

!

C070C01A-AAT

To remove the ignition keyC050A01A-AAT

1. Turn the ignition key to the "ACC" position.2. Simultaneously push and turn the ignition

key counterclockwise from the "ACC" posi-tion to the "LOCK" position.

3. The key can be removed in the "LOCK"position.

WARNING:Never run the engine in a closed or poorlyventilated area any longer than is needed tomove your car in or out of the area. Thecarbon monoxide gas emitted is odorlessand can cause serious injury or death.

C070C01E

C050A01E

LOCK

ACC

ON

START


5OPERATING THE MANUALTRANSAXLE (5 SPEED M/T)

C070A01NF-GAT

This shift pattern is imprinted on the shift knob.The transaxle is fully synchronized in all forwardgears so shifting to either a higher or a lowergear is easily accomplished.

C070A01NF-A

4. Turn the ignition key to the "START" positionand release it when the engine starts.After the engine has started, allow the engineto run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placingthe vehicle in gear.The starter should not be operated for morethan 15 seconds at a time. Wait 15-30seconds between starting attempts to pro-tect the starter from overheating.

C050B01A-AAT

Normal Conditions:

The Starting Procedure:

1. Insert key, and fasten the seat belt.2. Depress the clutch pedal fully and place the

gearshift lever (manual transaxle) in neutralor the selector lever (automatic transaxle) in"P" (park) position.

3. After turning the ignition key to the "ON"position, make certain all warning lights andgauges are functioning properly before start-ing the engine.

WARNING:Be sure that the clutch is fully depressedwhen starting a manual transaxle vehicle.Your manual transaxle equipped vehiclewill not start unless the clutch pedal is fullydepressed. On a manual transaxle equippedvehicle that can be started without de-pressing the clutch, there is the potential tocause damage to the vehicle or injury tosomeone inside or outside the vehicle as aresult of the forward or backward move-ment of the vehicle that will occur if theclutch is not depressed when the vehicle isstarted.

!


6

! WARNING:Do not downshift more than 2 gears ordownshift the gear when the engine isrunning at high speed (5,000 RPM or higher).Such a downshifting may damage the en-gine.

C070B02A-AAT

Using the Clutch

The clutch should be pressed all the way to thefloor before shifting, then released slowly. Theclutch pedal should always be fully releasedwhile driving. Do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal while driving. This can cause unneces-sary wear. Do not partially engage the clutch tohold the car on an incline. This causes unnec-essary wear. Use the foot brake or parkingbrake to hold the car on an incline. Do notoperate the clutch pedal rapidly and repeatedly.

o Do not use the shift lever as a handrestduring driving, as this can result in pre-mature wear of the transaxle shift forks.

! CAUTION:When downshifting from fifth gear to fourthgear, caution should be taken not to inad-vertently press the gear shift lever sidewaysin such a manner that second gear is en-gaged. Such a drastic downshift may causethe engine speed to increase to the pointthat the tachometer will enter the red-zone.Such over-revving of the engine may pos-sibly cause engine damage.

When shifting into reverse gear, pull the mis-shift prevention tab and shift into reverse gearposition.

NOTE:o To shift into reverse, rest the lever in

neutral for at least 3 seconds after yourcar is completely stopped. Then movethe lever into the reverse position.

o During cold weather, shifting may bedifficult until the transaxle lubricant haswarmed up. This is normal and not harm-ful to the transaxle.

o If you've come to a complete stop andit's hard to shift into 1st or R(Reverse),put the shift lever in N(Neutral) positionand release the clutch. Press the clutchpedal back down, and then shift into 1stor R(Reverse) gear position.

Mis-shiftpreventiontab

HNF3020


7

! WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.

C070D02O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This is extremely hazardous.Always leave the car in gear.

o Don't "ride" the brakes. This can cause themto overheat and malfunction. Instead, whenyou are driving down a long hill, slow downand shift to a lower gear. When you do this,engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.This will help avoid over-revving the engine,which can cause damage.

o Slow down when you encounter cross winds.This gives you much better control of yourcar.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into reverse. Thetransaxle can be damaged if you do not. Toshift into reverse, depress the clutch, movethe shift lever to neutral, wait three seconds,then shift to the reverse position.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

C070E02O-AAT

RECOMMENDED SHIFT POINTS

The shift points as shown on the chart arerecommended for optimum fuel economy andperformance.

Shift from-to

1-2

2-3

3-4

4-5

Recommended

15 mph (20 km/h)

25 mph (40 km/h)

35 mph (55 km/h)

45 mph (75 km/h)


8

NOTE:Depress the brake pedal when shift-ing.

The selector lever can be shifted freely.

The first few shifts on a new vehicle, or if thebattery has been disconnected, may besomewhat abrupt. This is a normal condi-tion, and the shifting sequence will adjustafter shifts are cycled a few times by theT.C.M (Transaxle Control Module).

!

C090A02NF

CAUTION:Never shift into "R" or "P" position while thevehicle is moving.

The indicator lights in the instrument clusterindicate the selector lever position when theignition is switched "ON". During sports modeoperation, the gear currently in use displays inthe numeral indicator.

C090B02A-AAT

The function of each position is as fol-lows:

o P (Park):

Use to hold the vehicle in place when parked orwhile starting the engine. Whenever parking thecar, apply the parking brake and shift the selec-tor lever to the "P" (Park) position.

CAUTION:Never place the selector lever in the "P"(Park) position unless the vehicle is fullystopped. Failure to observe this cautionwill cause severe damage to the transaxle.

!

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE(4 SPEED A/T, 5 SPEED A/T)

C090A01NF-GAT

(If Installed)

The highly efficient Hyundai automatic transaxlehas four/five forward speeds and one reversespeed. The individual speeds are selected au-tomatically, depending on the position of thespeed selector lever. The selector lever has 2gates; the main gate and the manual gate.

NOTE:For information on manual gate operation,refer to "Sports Mode".

In the main gate, the selector lever has 4positions.

C090A01NF


9

C090E01NF-GAT

o D (Drive):

Use for normal driving. The transaxle will auto-matically shift through a four/five gear sequence.

C090D02A-AAT

o N (Neutral):

In the "N" position, the transaxle is in neutral,which means that no gears are engaged. Theengine can be started with the shift lever in "N"position, although this is not recommendedexcept if the engine stalls while the car ismoving.

C090C01A-AAT

o R (Reverse):

Use for backing up the vehicle. Bring the car toa complete stop before shifting the selectorlever to "R" position.

CAUTION:o In sports mode, the driver must execute

upward shifts in accordance with pre-vailing road conditions, taking care tokeep the engine speed below the redzone.

o For engine protection, upward shifts aremade automatically when the enginerpm reaches the red zone.

o By rapidly moving the selector leverbackwards (-) twice it is possible to skipone gear, i.e., 3rd to 1st, 4th to 2nd or 5thto 3rd. Since sudden engine brakingand/or rapid acceleration can cause aloss of traction, however, downshiftsmust be made carefully in accordancewith the vehicle's speed.

!C090F02L-GAT

Sports Mode

Whether the vehicle is stationary or in motion,sports mode is selected by pushing the selectorlever from the "D" position into the manual gate.To return to "D" range operation, push theselector lever back into the main gate.In sports mode, moving the selector lever back-wards and forwards can make rapid gearshiftssimple. In contrast to a manual transaxle, thesports mode allows gearshifts with the accel-erator pedal depressed.UP (+) : Push the lever forward once to shift upone gear.DOWN (-) : Pull the lever backwards once toshift down one gear.SKIP : By rapidly moving the selector forwardor backward twice, it is possible to skip onegear, i.e. 1st to 3rd or 3rd to 1st .

C090F02NF

NOTE:o In sports mode, only the four/five for-

ward gears can be selected. To reverse orpark the vehicle, move the selector leverto the "R" or "P" position as required.

o In sports mode, downward shifts aremade automatically when the vehicleslows down. When the vehicle stops, 1stgear is automatically selected.


10

!

C090I03L-GAT

CAUTION:o Shift into "R" and "P" position only when

the vehicle has completely stopped.o Do not accelerate the engine in reverse

or any of the forward positions with thebrakes applied.

o Always apply the footbrake when shift-ing from "P" or "N", to "R" or "D"position.

o Do not use the "P" (Park) position inplace of the parking brake. Always setthe parking brake, shift the transaxleinto "P" (Park) position and turn off theignition when you leave the vehicle, evenmomentarily. Never leave the vehicleunattended while the engine is running.

o When accelerating from a stop on asteep hill, the vehicle may have a ten-dency to roll backwards. Shifting theshift lever into 2nd gear while in Sportmode will help prevent the vehicle fromrolling backwards.

o Check the automatic transaxle fluid levelregularly, and add fluid as necessary.

o See the maintenance schedule for theproper fluid recommendation.

C090H01L-GAT

NOTE:o For smooth and safe operation, depress

the brake pedal when shifting from "Neu-tral" position or "Park" position to aforward or reverse gear.

o The ignition key must be in the "ON"position and the brake pedal fully de-pressed in order to move the shift leverfrom the "P" (Park) position to any of theother positions.

o It is always possible to shift from "R","N", or "D" position to "P" position. Thevehicle must be fully stopped to avoidtransaxle damage.

o To maintain the required levels of ve-hicle performance and safety, the sys-tem may not execute certain gearshiftswhen the selector lever is operated.

o Before driving away from a stop on aslippery road, push the selector leverforward into the +(UP) position. Thiscauses the transaxle to shift into 2ndgear which is better for smooth drivingaway on a slippery road. Push the selec-tor lever to the -(DOWN) side to shiftback to 1st gear.

C090J01NF-GAT

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE (If Installed)

If you cannot move the shift lever from the "P"(Park) position to any other position with thebrake pedal fully depressed and the ignition keyin the "ON" position, remove the cap on theconsole and with a thin object such as a flat-head screwdriver, push the shift lock releasebutton down. Then, with the brake pedal de-pressed, move the shift lever to the desiredposition, and then the shift lock release buttonwill automatically return to its original positionafter shifting from the "P" (Park) position. Then,reinstall the cap.If you need to use the shift lock release, it couldmean your car is developing a problem. Havethe car checked by your Hyundai dealer.

C090J01NF


11POWER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS

!C090N03O-AAT

Good Driving Practices

o Never move the gear selector lever from "P"or "N" to any other position with the accelera-tor pedal depressed.

o Never move the gear selector lever into "P"when the vehicle is in motion.

o Be sure the car is completely stopped beforeyou attempt to shift into "R".

o Never take the car out of gear and coastdown a hill. This may be extremely hazard-ous. Always leave the car in gear whenmoving.

o Do not "ride" the brakes. This can causethem to overheat and malfunction. Instead,when you are driving down a long hill, slowdown and shift to a lower gear. When you dothis, engine braking will help slow the car.

o Slow down before shifting to a lower gear.Otherwise, the lower gear may not be en-gaged.

o Always use the parking brake. Do not de-pend on placing the transaxle in "P" to keepthe car from moving.

o Exercise extreme caution when driving on aslippery surface. Be especially careful whenbraking, accelerating or shifting gears. On aslippery surface, an abrupt change in ve-hicle speed can cause the drive wheels tolose traction and the vehicle to go out ofcontrol.

WARNING:o Avoid high cornering speeds.o Do not make quick steering wheel move-

ments, such as sharp lane changes orfast, sharp turns.

o Always wear your seat belts.In a collision, an unbelted person issignificantly more likely to die than aperson wearing a seat belt.

o The risk of rollover is greatly increased ifyou lose control of your vehicle at high-way speeds.

o Loss of control often occurs if two ormore wheels drop off the roadway andthe driver oversteers to reenter the road-way.

o In the event your vehicle leaves the road-way, do not steer sharply. Instead, slowdown before pulling back into the travellanes.

o Never exceed posted speed limits.o Excessive depressing of the accelerater

pedal in slippery driving conditions suchas pulling out of deep snow or mud maycause severe damage to the transaxle.Rocking the vehicle is not recommended.Rather, use an appropriate towingmethod.

C100A01NF-AAT

(With Automatic Transaxle) (If Installed)

To adjust the position of the accelerator andbrake pedals, turn the ignition key to the "ON"position with the selector lever in the "P" positionand push the switch.

If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move rearward.If you push the " " portion of the switch, thepedals move forward.

HNF2115-A


12

!

! WARNING:ABS (ESC) will not prevent accidents due toimproper or dangerous driving maneuvers.Even though vehicle control is improvedduring emergency braking, always main-tain a safe distance between you and ob-jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should alwaysbe reduced during extreme road condi-tions.The braking distance for cars equippedwith an anti-lock braking system (ESC) maybe longer than for those without it in thefollowing road conditions.During these conditions the vehicle shouldbe driven at reduced speeds:

o Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads.o With tire chains installed.o On roads where the road surface is pit-

ted or has different surface height.

The safety features of an ABS (ESC)equipped vehicle should not be tested byhigh speed driving or cornering. This couldendanger the safety of yourself or others.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

C120A03A-AAT

(If Installed)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) is designedto prevent wheel lock-up during sudden brakingor on hazardous road surfaces. The ABS con-trol module monitors the wheel speed and con-trols the pressure applied to each brake. Thus,in emergency situations or on slick roads, ABSwill increase vehicle control during braking.

NOTE:During ABS (ESC) operation, a pulsationmay be felt in the brake pedal when thebrakes are applied. Also, a noise may beheard in the engine compartment whilebraking. These conditions are normal andindicate that the anti-lock brake system(Electronic Stability Control System) is func-tioning properly.

Setting the driver's position

1) Be sure the parking brake is engaged.2) Move the accelerator and brake pedals to

the front most position by pushing the " "portion of the switch.

3) Adjust the seat position and the steeringwheel angle properly.

4) Move the pedals toward you until you canfully depress the brake pedal by pushing the" " portion of the switch.

5) Depress the pedals a few times to get usedto the feel after adjusting.

WARNING:o Adjust the pedals after parking the ve-

hicle on level ground. Never attempt toadjust the pedals while the vehicle ismoving.

o Never adjust the pedals with your footon the accelerator pedal as this mayresult in increasing the engine speedand acceleration.

o Make sure that you can fully depress thebrake pedal before driving. Otherwise,you may not be able to hold down thebrake pedal firmly in an emergency stop.


13

CAUTION:Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes maycause the ESC system to malfunction. Whenreplacing tires, make sure they are the samesize as your original tires.

!

ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL(ESC) SYSTEM

C310A01NF-AAT

(If Installed)

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemis designed to stabilize the vehicle during cor-nering manuevers. ESC checks where you aresteering and where the vehicle is actually going.ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels andintervenes in the engine management systemto stabilize the vehicle.

The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) systemis an electronic system designed to help thedriver maintain vehicle control under adverseconditions. It is not a substitute for safe drivingpractices. Factors including speed, road con-ditions and driver steering input can all affectwhether ESC will be effective in preventing a

B310A01NF-A

loss of control. It is still your responsibility todrive and corner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

! WARNING:Electronic stability control is only a drivingaid; all normal precautions for driving ininclement weather and on slippery roadsurfaces should be observed.

C310B01NF-AAT

ESC ON/OFF Mode

When the ESC is operating, the ESC indicatorin the instrument cluster will blink.If you turn the system off by pressing the ESCswitch, the ESC-OFF indicator will come on andstay on. In the ESC-OFF mode, the stabilitycontrol will be deactivated. Adjust your drivingaccordingly. To turn the system back on, pressthe switch again. The ESC-OFF indicator shouldgo off.

NOTE:The ESC mode will automatically be turnedON after the engine is turned off and re-started.


14

!

GOOD BRAKING PRACTICES

C130A01A-AAT

WARNING:Nothing should be carried on top of theshelf panel behind the rear seat. If therewere an accident or a sudden stop, suchobjects could move forward and causedamage to the vehicle or injure the occu-pants.

o After being parked, check to be sure theparking brake is not engaged and that theparking brake indicator light is out beforedriving away.

o Driving through water may get the brakeswet. They can also get wet when the car iswashed. Wet brakes can be dangerous!Your car will not stop as quickly if the brakesare wet. Wet brakes may cause the car topull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply thebrakes lightly until the braking action returnsto normal, taking care to keep the car undercontrol at all times. If the braking action doesnot return to normal, stop as soon as it is safeto do so and call your Hyundai dealer forassistance.

o Don't coast down hills with the car out of gear.This is extremely hazardous. Keep the carin gear at all times, use the brakes to slowdown, then shift to a lower gear so that enginebraking will help you maintain a safe speed.

o Don't "ride" the brake pedal. Resting yourfoot on the brake pedal while driving can bedangerous because it can result in the brakesoverheating and losing their effectiveness. Italso increases the wear of the brake com-ponents.

o If a tire goes flat while you are driving, applythe brakes gently and keep the car pointedstraight ahead while you slow down. Whenyou are moving slowly enough for it to be safeto do so, pull off the road and stop in a safeplace.

o If your car is equipped with an automatictransaxle, don't let your car creep forward.To avoid creeping forward, keep your footfirmly on the brake pedal when the car isstopped.

o Use caution when parking on a hill. Engagethe parking brake and place the gear selec-tor lever in "P" (automatic transaxle) or in firstor reverse gear (manual transaxle). If yourcar is facing downhill, turn the front wheelsinto the curb to help keep the car from rolling.If your car is facing uphill, turn the frontwheels away from the curb to help keep thecar from rolling. If there is no curb or if it isrequired by other conditions to keep the carfrom rolling, block the wheels.

C310D01NF-AAT

Indicators and Warning

The indicators should illuminate when the igni-tion key is turned to ON or START but shouldgo out after three seconds.If the indicators do not illuminate, or the ESC orESC-OFF indicator does not go out after 3seconds, have the vehicle checked by anauthorized dealer.

Should there be any unusual operation of thedevice while driving, the ESC-OFF indicatorilluminates as a warning.If the ESC-OFF indicator illuminates, drive yourcar to a safe place and stop the engine.Then, start the engine again to check if the ESC-OFF indicator goes out.

If the indicator remains lit even after the enginehas been started, have your car checked by anauthorized Hyundai dealer.


15

o Be sure that the wheels are aligned cor-rectly. Improper alignment can result fromhitting curbs or driving too fast over irregularsurfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tirewear and may also result in other problemsas well as greater fuel consumption.

o Keep your car in good condition. For betterfuel economy and reduced maintenancecosts, maintain your car in accordance withthe maintenance schedule in Section 5. Ifyou drive your car in severe conditions,more frequent maintenance is required (seeSection 5 for details).

o Keep your car clean. For maximum service,your Hyundai should be kept clean and freeof corrosive materials. It is especially impor-tant that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed toaccumulate on the underside of the car. Thisextra weight can result in increased fuelconsumption and also contribute to corro-sion.

o Travel lightly. Don't carry unnecessaryweight in your car. Weight reduces fueleconomy.

o Don't let the engine idle longer than neces-sary. If you are waiting (and not in traffic),turn off your engine and restart only whenyou're ready to go.

DRIVING FOR ECONOMY

C140A01A-AAT

You can save fuel and get more miles from yourcar if you follow these suggestions:

o Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a moderaterate. Don't make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruisingspeed. Don't race between stoplights. Try toadjust your speed to that of the other trafficso you don't have to change speeds unnec-essarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-sible. Always maintain a safe distance fromother vehicles so you can avoid unneces-sary braking. This also reduces brake wear.

o Drive at a moderate speed. The faster youdrive, the more fuel your car uses. Driving ata moderate speed, especially on the high-way, is one of the most effective ways toreduce fuel consumption.

o Don't "ride" the brake or clutch pedal. Thiscan increase fuel consumption and alsoincrease wear on these components. Inaddition, driving with your foot resting on thebrake pedal may cause the brakes to over-heat, which reduces their effectiveness andmay lead to more serious consequences.

o Take care of your tires. Keep them inflatedto the recommended pressure. Incorrectinflation, either too much or too little, resultsin unnecessary tire wear. Check the tirepressures at least once a month.

o Under some conditions your parking brakecan freeze in the engaged position. This ismost likely to happen when there is anaccumulation of snow or ice around or nearthe rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. Ifthere is a risk that the parking brake mayfreeze, apply it only temporarily while you putthe gear selector lever in "P" (automatic) orin first or reverse gear (manual transaxle)and block the rear wheels so the car cannotroll. Then release the parking brake.

o Do not hold the vehicle on the upgrade withthe accelerator pedal. This can cause thetransaxle to overheat. Always use the brakepedal or parking brake.


16

o Remember, your Hyundai does not requireextended warm-up. As soon as the engineis running smoothly, you can drive away. Invery cold weather, however, give your en-gine a slightly longer warm-up period.

o Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Luggingis driving too slowly in too high a gear result-ing in the engine bucking. If this happens,shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racingthe engine beyond its safe limit. This can beavoided by shifting at the recommendedspeeds.

o Use your air conditioning sparingly. The airconditioning system is operated by enginepower so your fuel economy is reducedwhen you use it.

SMOOTH CORNERING

C150A01A-AAT

Avoid braking or gear changing in corners,especially when roads are wet. Ideally, cornersshould always be taken under gentle accelera-tion. If you follow these suggestions, tire wearwill be held to a minimum.

C160A01A-AAT

The more severe weather conditions of winterresult in greater wear and other problems. Tominimize the problems of winter driving, youshould follow these suggestions:

C160B01A-AAT

Snowy or Icy Conditions

To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it may benecessary to use snow tires or to install tirechains on your tires. If snow tires are needed,it is necessary to select tires equivalent in sizeand type of the original equipment tires. Failureto do so may adversely affect the safety andhandling of your car. Furthermore, speeding,rapid acceleration, sudden brake applications,and sharp turns are potentially very hazardouspractices.During deceleration, use engine braking to thefullest extent. Sudden brake applications onsnowy or icy roads may cause skids to occur.You need to keep sufficient distance betweenthe vehicle in operation in front and your vehicle.Also, apply the brake gently. It should be notedthat installing tire chains on the tire will providea greater driving force, but will not prevent sideskids.

NOTE:Tire chains are not legal in all states. Checkstate laws before fitting tire chains.

WINTER DRIVING


17

C160H02A-AAT

Use Approved Window Washer Anti-Freeze in System

To keep the water in the window washer systemfrom freezing, add an approved window washeranti-freeze solution in accordance with instruc-tions on the container. Window washer anti-freeze is available from Hyundai dealers andmost auto parts outlets. Do not use enginecoolant or other types of anti-freeze as thesemay damage the paint finish.

C160G01A-AAT

To Keep Locks from Freezing

To keep the locks from freezing, squirt anapproved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the keyopening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it withan approved de-icing fluid to remove the ice. Ifthe lock is frozen internally, you may be able tothaw it out by using a heated key. Handle theheated key with care to avoid injury.

C160F01A-AAT

Check Spark Plugs and IgnitionSystem

Inspect your spark plugs as described in Sec-tion 6 and replace them if necessary. Alsocheck all ignition wiring and components to besure they are not cracked, worn or damaged inany way.

C160E01A-AAT

Change to "Winter Weight" Oil ifNecessary

In some climates it is recommended that a lowerviscosity "winter weight" oil be used during coldweather. See Section 9 for recommendations.If you aren't sure what weight oil you should use,consult your Hyundai dealer.

C160D01A-AAT

Check Battery and Cables

Winter puts additional burdens on the batterysystem. Visually inspect the battery and cablesas described in Section 6. The level of chargein your battery can be checked by your Hyundaidealer or a service station.

C160C01A-AAT

Use High Quality Ethylene GlycolCoolant

Your Hyundai is delivered with high qualityethylene glycol coolant in the cooling system. Itis the only type of coolant that should be usedbecause it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-ing system, lubricates the water pump andprevents freezing. Be sure to replace or replen-ish your coolant in accordance with the main-tenance schedule in Section 5. Before winter,have your coolant tested to assure that itsfreezing point is sufficient for the temperaturesanticipated during the winter.


18

C160J01A-AAT

Don't Let Ice and Snow AccumulateUnderneath

Under some conditions, snow and ice can buildup under the fenders and interfere with thesteering. When driving in severe winter condi-tions where this may happen, you should peri-odically check underneath the car to be sure themovement of the front wheels and the steeringcomponents is not obstructed.

C160I01L-AAT

Don't Let Your Parking Brake Freeze

Under some conditions your parking brake canfreeze in the engaged position. This is mostlikely to happen when there is an accumulationof snow or ice around or near the rear brakesor if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk theparking brake may freeze, apply it only tempo-rarily while you put the gear selector lever in "P"and block the rear wheels so the car cannot roll.Then release the parking brake.

C160K01A-AAT

Carry Emergency Equipment

Depending on the severity of the weather whereyou drive your car, you should carry appropri-ate emergency equipment. Some of the itemsyou may want to carry include tire chains, towstraps or chains, flashlight, emergency flares,sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a window scraper,gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, a blanket, etc.

HIGHER SPEED MOTORING

C170A01A-AAT

Pre-Trip Inspections

1. Tires:Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specifica-tion. Low tire inflation pressures will result inoverheating and possible failure of the tires.Avoid using worn or damaged tires which mayresult in reduced traction or tire failure.

NOTE:Never exceed the maximum tire inflationpressure shown on the tires.

2. Fuel, engine coolant and engine oil:High speed travel consumes more fuel thanurban motoring. Do not forget to check bothengine coolant and engine oil.

3. Drive belt:A loose or damaged drive belt may result inoverheating of the engine.


19

C190B01S-AAT

Trailer Hitches

Select the proper hitch and ball combination,making sure that its location is compatible withthat of the trailer or vehicle being towed.Use a quality non-equalizing hitch which distrib-utes the tongue load uniformly throughout thechassis.

The hitch should be bolted securely to the carand installed by a qualified technician. DO NOTUSE A HITCH DESIGNED FOR TEMPORARYINSTALLATION AND NEVER USE ONE THATATTACHES ONLY TO THE BUMPER.

C190C01Y-AAT

Trailer Brakes

If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,make sure it conforms to federal and/or localregulations and that it is properly installed andoperating correctly.

NOTE:If you tow a trailer or vehicle, your car willrequire more frequent maintenance due tothe additional load. See Maintenance UnderSevere Usage Conditions" on page 5-6.

TRAILER OR VEHICLE TOWING

!

C190A01S-AAT

If you are considering towing with your car, youshould first check with your State's Departmentof Motor Vehicles to determine their legal re-quirements.Since laws vary from State to State the require-ments for towing trailers, cars, or other types ofvehicles or apparatus may differ. Ask yourHyundai dealer for further details before towing.

CAUTION:Do not do any towing with your car duringits first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) in order toallow the engine to properly break in. Fail-ure to heed this caution may result in seri-ous engine or transaxle damage.

USE OF LIGHTS

C180A01A-AAT

Check your lights regularly for correct opera-tion and always keep them clean. When drivingduring the day in conditions of poor visibility, itis helpful to drive with headlights on low beam.This enables you to be seen as well as to see.


20

C190D01S-AAT

Safety Chains

Should the hitch connection between your carand the trailer or vehicle you are towing fail, thetrailer or vehicle could wander dangerouslyacross other lanes of traffic and ultimately leavethe roadway. To eliminate this potentially dan-gerous situation, safety chains, attached be-tween your car and the trailer or towed vehicle,are required in most states.

CAUTION:o Never connect a trailer brake system

directly to the vehicle brake system.o When towing a trailer on steep grades (in

excess of 12%) pay close attention to theengine coolant temperature gauge toensure the engine does not overheat. Ifthe needle of the coolant temperaturegauge moves across the dial towards"H" (HOT), pull over and stop as soon asit is safe to do so, and allow the engineto idle until it cools down. You mayproceed once the engine has cooledsufficiently.

!

C190E02JM

Gross Axle Weight Gross VehicleWeight

2. The total gross vehicle weight with trailermust not exceed the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) shown on thevehicle identification plate (see page 8-2). The total gross vehicle weight is thecombined weight of the vehicle, driver,all passengers and their luggage, cargo,hitch, trailer tongue load and other op-tional equipment.

C190E01NF-AAT

Trailer Weight Limit

Tongue Load Total Trailer Weight

o Keep the tongue load 10% of the total trailerload.

o Tongue load

o Tongue loads can be increased or de-creased by re-distributing the load in thetrailer.This can be verified by checking the totalweight of the loaded trailer and then checkingthe load on the tongue.

C190E01JM

x 100 = 10% (MAX)Total trailer weight

NOTE:1. Never load the trailer with more weight in

the back than in the front. About 60% ofthe trailer load should be in the front halfon the trailer and the remaining 40% inthe rear.


21

C190F01Y-GAT

Trailer or Vehicle Towing Tips

1. Before towing, check hitch and safety chainconnections as well as proper operation ofthe trailer running lights, brake lights, andturn signals.

2. Always drive your vehicle at a moderatespeed. (Less than 60 mph)

3. Trailer towing requires more fuel than normalconditions.

4. To maintain engine braking efficiency andelectrical charging performance, do not towa trailer with the transaxle in fifth gear (manualtransaxle).

5. Always secure items in the trailer to preventload shift while driving.

6. Check the condition and air pressure of alltires on the trailer and your car. Low tirepressure can seriously affect the handling.Also check the spare tire.

7. The vehicle/trailer combination is more af-fected by crosswind and buffeting.When being passed by a large vehicle, keepa constant speed and steer straight ahead.If there is too much wind buffeting, slow downto get out of the other vehicle's air turbulence.

!

lbs(kg)

!

Tongue

200 (90)

-

With 3.3L

Brake 2.4L

Without Brake

Maximum Towable Weight

Trailer

2000 (900)

1500 (675)

1000 (450)

CAUTION:The following specifications are recom-mended when towing a trailer. The loadedtrailer weight cannot safely exceed the val-ues in the chart below.

WARNING:o Improperly loading your vehicle and

trailer can seriously affect its steeringand braking performance causing acrash which could cause serious injuryor death.

o Towing a trailer affects vehicle handlingand braking.

o Drive more slowly when towing a trailerand allow more distance when braking.

o Be careful when driving in slippery andwindy conditions.

o Be careful when turning and while driv-ing up and down hills.

3. The front or rear axle weight must notexceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR) shown on the vehicle identifi-cation plate (see page 8-2). It is possiblethat your towing package does not ex-ceed the GVWR but exceeds the GAWR.Improper trailer loading and/or too muchluggage in the trunk can overload therear axle. Redistribute the load and checkthe axle weight again.


22

8. When parking your car and trailer, especiallyon a hill, be sure to follow all the normalprecautions. Turn your front wheel into thecurb, set the parking brake firmly, and put thetransaxle in 1st or Reverse (manual) or Park(automatic). In addition, place wheel chocksat each of the trailer's tires.

9. If the trailer has electric brakes, start yourvehicle and trailer moving, and then apply thetrailer brake controller by hand to be sure thebrakes are working. This lets you checkyour electrical connection at the same time.

10.During your trip, check occasionally to besure that the load is secure, and that thelights and any trailer brakes are still working.

11.Avoid jerky starts, sudden acceleration orsudden stops.

12.Avoid sharp turns and rapid lane changes.13.Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long

or too frequently. This could cause the brakesto overheat, resulting in reduced brakingefficiency.

14.When going down a hill, shift into a lower gearand use the engine braking effect.When ascending a long grade, downshift thetransaxle to a lower gear and reduce speedto reduce chances of engine overloadingand/or overheating.

CAUTION:If overheating should occur when towing,(the temperature gauge reads near red zone),taking the following action may reduce oreliminate the problem.

1. Turn off the air conditioner.2. Reduce highway speed.3. Select a lower gear when going uphill.4. While in stop and go traffic, place the

gear selector in park or neutral and idlethe engine at a higher speed.

!

VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT

C190F01JM-AAT

Tire and Loading Information Label

I030A03NF-A

The tire label located on the driver'sside of the center pillar outer panelgives the original tire size, cold tirepressures recommended for your ve-

15.If you have to stop while going uphill, do nothold the vehicle in place by pressing on theaccelerator. This can cause the automatictransaxle to overheat. Use the parking brakeor footbrake.

NOTE:When towing check transaxle fluid morefrequently.

I030A04NF-A


23

C190F01JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

300 lbs

(136 kg)

1100 lbs

(489 kg)

Example 1

Item

A

B

C

Description

Vehicle Capacity Weight

Subtract Occupant Weight

150 lbs (68 kg) × 2

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C

hicle, the number of people that can bein your vehicle and vehicle capacityweight.

Steps for Determining Correct LoadLimit

(1)Locate the statement "The combinedweight of occupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX pounds'' on yourvehicle's placard.

(2)Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

(3)Subtract the combined weight of thedriver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX pounds.

(4)The resulting figure equals the avail-able amount of cargo and luggageload capacity. For example, if the"XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs, andthere will be five 150 lb. passengersin your vehicle, the amount of avail-able cargo and luggage load capac-ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 x 150) =650 lbs.)

(5)Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded onthe vehicle. That weight may notsafely exceed the available cargoand luggage load capacity calcu-lated in Step 4.

(6)If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,load from your trailer will be trans-ferred to your vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how this re-duces the available cargo and lug-gage load capacity of your vehicle.


24

C190F02JM

Example 2

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

750 lbs

(340 kg)

650 lbs

(295 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



150 lbs (68 kg) x 5

Available Cargo and

Luggage Weight

A B C

C190F03JM

Total

1400 lbs

(635 kg)

860 lbs

(390 kg)

540 lbs

(245 kg)

Item

A

B

C

Description



172 lbs (78 kg) x 5

Available Cargo Weight

Example 3

A B C

Refer to your vehicle's tire and loadinginformation label for specific informa-tion about your vehicle's capacity weightand seating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers andcargo should never exceed yourvehicle's capacity weight.


25

! WARNING:o Overloading your vehicle can

cause heat buildup in yourvehicle's tires and possible tirefailure that could lead to a crash.

o Overloading your vehicle cancause increased stopping dis-tances that could lead to a crash.

o A crash resulting from poor han-dling vehicle damage, tire failure,or increased stopping distancescould result in serious injury ordeath.

!

This label also tells you the maximumweights that can be supported by thefront and rear axles, called Gross AxleWeight Rating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on your front and rearaxles, you need to go to a weigh stationand weigh your vehicle. Your dealer canhelp you with this. Be sure to spread outyour load equally on the left and rightsides of the centerline.

WARNING:o Never exceed the GVWR for your

vehicle or the GAWR for either thefront or rear axle.

o Do not load your vehicle anyheavier than the GVWR or eitherthe maximum front or rear GAWR.If you do, parts on your vehiclecan break, and it can change theway your vehicle handles. Thiscould cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading canshorten the life of your vehicle.

C190G02JM-AAT

Compliance Label

The compliance label is located on thedriver's side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The label shows the size of your originaltires and the inflation pressures neededto obtain the gross weight capacity ofyour vehicle. This is called the GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). TheGVWR includes the weight of the ve-hicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo.

C190G01JM


26

!WARNING:

Items you carry inside your vehiclecan strike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in a crash.

o Put things in the cargo area ofyour vehicle. Try to spread theweight evenly.

o Never stack items, like suitcases,inside the vehicle above the topsof the seats.

o Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

o When you carry something insidethe vehicle, secure it.

o Do not drive with a seat foldeddown unless necessary.

NOTE:o Overloading your vehicle may

cause damage. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty. Donot overload your vehicle.

o Using heavier suspension com-ponents to get added durabilitymight not change your weight rat-ings. Ask your dealer to help youload your vehicle the right way.

The label will help you decide how muchcargo and installed equipment yourvehicle can carry.

If you carry items inside your vehicle –like suitcases, tools, packages, or any-thing else – they move as fast as thevehicle goes. If you have to stop or turnquickly, or if there is a crash, the itemswill keep going and can cause an injuryif they strike the driver or a passenger.

If the Engine Will Not Start ............................................ 3-2Jump Starting ................................................................ 3-3If the Engine Overheats ................................................ 3-4Spare Tire ..................................................................... 3-5If You Have a Flat Tire .................................................. 3-6Changing a Flat Tire ...................................................... 3-6If Your Vehicle Must Be Towed................................... 3-11Emergency Towing ..................................................... 3-13If You Lose Your Keys ................................................ 3-13 3


3

32


IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START

!

D010A01A-AAT D010B02A-AAT

If Engine Doesn't Turn Over or TurnsOver Slowly

D010C02Y-AAT

If Engine Turns Over Normally but DoesNot Start

1. Check fuel level.2. With the key in the "OFF" position, check all

connectors at ignition, coil and spark plugs.Reconnect any that may be disconnected orloose.

3. Check the fuel line in the engine compart-ment.

4. If the engine still does not start, call a Hyundaidealer or seek other qualified assistance.

D010D01A-AAT

If Engine Stalls While Driving

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping astraight line. Move cautiously off the road toa safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.3. Try to start the engine again. If your vehicle

will not start, contact a Hyundai dealer orseek other qualified assistance.

WARNING:If the engine will not start, do not push orpull the car to start it. This could result in acollision or cause other damage. In addi-tion, push or pull starting may cause thecatalytic converter to be overloaded andcreate a fire hazard.

1. If your car has an automatic transaxle, besure the gear selector lever is in "N" or "P"and the emergency brake is set.

2. Check the battery connections to be surethey are clean and tight.

3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims orgoes out when you operate the starter, thebattery is discharged.

4. Check the starter connections to be surethey are securely tightened.

5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. Seeinstructions for "Jump Starting".

HNF5017

3WHAT TO DO IN AN EMERGENCY

3JUMP STARTING

!

o If you should accidentally get acid on yourskin or in your eyes, immediately removeany contaminated clothing and flush the areawith clean water for at least 15 minutes. Thenpromptly obtain medical attention. If youmust be transported to an emergency facil-ity, continue to apply water to the affectedarea with a sponge or cloth.

o The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Donot smoke or allow a spark or an open flamein the vicinity.

o The battery being used to provide the jumpstart must be 12-volt. If you cannot deter-mine that it is a 12-volt battery, do not attemptto use it for the jump start.

o To jump start a car with a discharged battery,follow this procedure exactly:

1. If the booster battery is installed in anothervehicle, be sure the two vehicles are nottouching.

2. Turn off all unnecessary lights and acces-sories in both vehicles.

3. Attach the clamps of the jumper cable in theexact location shown on the illustration. First,attach one clamp of the jumper cable to thepositive (+) post or cable of the dischargedbattery.

Then attach the other end of the same cableto the positive (+) post or cable of the boosterbattery. Next, using the other cable, attachone clamp to the negative (-) post or cableof the booster battery. Then attach the otherend of that cable to a solid metal part of theengine of the vehicle with the dischargedbattery away from the battery. Do not con-nect the cable to any moving part.

4. Start the engine in the car with the boosterbattery and let it run for a few minutes. Thiswill help to assure that the booster battery isfully charged. During the jumping operation,run the engine in this vehicle at about 2,000rpm.

5. Start the engine in the car with the dis-charged battery using the normal startingprocedure. After the engine starts, leave thejumper cables connected and let the enginerun at fast idle or about 2,000 rpm for severalminutes.

6. Carefully remove the jumper cables in thereverse order of attachment.

If you do not know why your battery becamedischarged (because the lights were left on,etc.), have the charging system checked byyour Hyundai dealer.

D020A03A-AAT

WARNING:The gas produced by the battery during thejump-start operation is highly explosive. Ifthese instructions are not followed exactly,serious personal injury and damage to thevehicle may occur! If you are not sure howto follow this procedure, seek qualifiedassistance. Automobile batteries containsulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highlycorrosive. When jump starting, wear pro-tective glasses and be careful not to getacid on yourself, your clothing or on the car.

HNF4001

Boosterbattery

Dischargedbattery

34


IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS

!

!

!

WARNING:While the engine is running, keep hair,hands and clothing away from moving partssuch as the fan and drive belts to preventinjury.

5. If the water pump drive belt is broken orengine coolant is leaking out, stop the engineimmediately and call the nearest Hyundaidealer for assistance.

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. This can allow coolant to beblown out of the opening and cause seri-ous burns.

6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheat-ing, wait until the engine temperature hasreturned to normal. Then, if coolant has beenlost, carefully add coolant to the reservoir(page 6-9) to bring the fluid level in thereservoir up to the halfway mark.

7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for fur-ther signs of overheating. If overheatinghappens again, call a Hyundai dealer forassistance.

CAUTION:Serious loss of coolant indicates there is aleak in the cooling system and this shouldbe checked as soon as possible by a Hyundaidealer.

D030A02A-AAT

If your temperature gauge indicates overheat-ing, you experience a loss of power, or hear loudpinging or knocking, the engine is probably toohot. If this happens, you should:

1. Pull off the road and stop as soon as it is safeto do so.

2. Place the gear selector lever in "P" (auto-matic) or neutral (manual transaxle) and setthe parking brake. If the air conditioning is on,turn it off.

3. If engine coolant is running out under the caror steam is coming out from the hood, stopthe engine. Do not open the hood until thecoolant has stopped running or the steaminghas stopped. If there is no visible loss ofengine coolant and no steam, leave theengine running and check to be sure theengine cooling fan is operating. If the fan isnot running, turn the engine off.

4. Check to see if the water pump drive belt ismissing. If it is not missing, check to see thatit is tight. If the drive belt seems to besatisfactory, check for coolant leaking fromthe radiator, hoses or under the car. (If theair conditioning had been in use, it is normalfor cold water to be draining from it when youstop).


5SPARE TIRE

D040A02GK-AAT

TEMPORARY SPARE TIRE

The following instructions for the tem-porary spare tire should be observed:

1. Check inflation pressure as soon aspractical after installing the sparetire, and adjust to the specified pres-sure. The tire pressure should beperiodically checked and maintainedat the specified pressure while thetire is stored.

Tire Size

Inflation Pressure

T125/80 D16

420 KPA(60 PSI)

4. As the temporary spare tire is spe-cifically designed for your car, itshould not be used on any othervehicle.

5. The temporary spare tire should notbe used on any other wheels, norshould standard tires, snow tires,wheel covers or trim rings be usedwith the temporary spare wheel. Ifsuch use is attempted, damage tothese items or other car componentsmay occur.

6. The temporary spare tire pressureshould be checked once a monthwhile the tire is stored.

2. The spare tire should only be usedtemporarily and should be returnedto the luggage compartment as soonas the original tire can be repaired orreplaced.

3. Continuous use at speeds of over 50mph (80 km/h) is not recommended.

Spare Tire Pressure

CAUTION:o Do not use snow chains with your

temporary spare tire.o Do not use more than one tempo-

rary spare tire at a time.o Do not tow a trailer while the tem-

porary spare tire is installed.

!

D040B01NF-GAT

Handling the Spare Tire

To remove the spare tire, take out thetool receptacle and remove the installa-tion bolt by turning it counterclockwise.To replace the spare tire in its storagecompartment, tighten the bolt firmlywith your fingers until there is no moreplay in the spare tire.

HNF4008

36


CHANGING A FLAT TIREIF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE

D060A01A-AAT

The procedure described on the follow-ing pages can be used to rotate tires aswell as to change a flat tire. Whenpreparing to change a flat tire, check tobe sure the gear selector lever is in "P"(automatic transaxle) or reverse gear(manual transaxle) and that the parkingbrake is set, then:

D050A01A-AAT

If a tire goes flat while you are driving:

1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedaland let the car slow down while drivingstraight ahead. Do not apply the brakesimmediately or attempt to pull off theroad as this may cause a loss ofcontrol. When the car has slowed tosuch a speed that it is safe to do so,brake carefully and pull off the road.Drive off the road as far as possibleand park on firm, level ground. If youare on a divided highway, do not parkin the median area between the twotraffic lanes.

2. When the car is stopped, turn on youremergency hazard flashers, set theparking brake and put the transaxle in"P" (automatic) or reverse (manualtransaxle).

3. Have all passengers get out of the car.Be sure they all get out on the side ofthe car that is away from traffic.

4. Change the tire according to the in-structions provided as follows.

D060A01NF-A

D060B01NF-GAT

1. Obtain Spare Tire and Tool

D060B01NF-A

Take out the tool receptacle and turnthe installation bolt counterclockwiseto remove spare tire from the trunk.


7

D060C01A-AAT

2. Block the Wheel

Block the wheel that is diagonally oppo-site from the flat to keep the vehiclefrom rolling when the car is raised on thejack.

HNF4009

Flat tire

D060E01A-AAT

4. Put the Jack in Place

The base of the jack should be placedon firm, level ground. The jack shouldbe positioned as shown in the drawing.

D060D01A-AAT

3. Loosen Wheel Nuts

The wheel nuts should be loosenedslightly before raising the car. To loosenthe nuts, turn the wrench handle coun-terclockwise. When doing this, be surethat the socket is seated completelyover the nut so it cannot slip off. Formaximum leverage, position the wrenchso the handle is to the left as shown inthe drawing. Then, while holding thewrench near the end of the handle, pushdown on it with steady pressure. Do notremove the nuts at this time. Justloosen them about one-half turn.

HNF4011-A D060E01NF-A

38


!

Raise the car high enough so that thefully inflated spare tire can be installed.To do this, you will need more groundclearance than is required to removethe flat tire.

D060F02E-AAT

5. Raising the Car

After inserting a wrench bar into thewheel nut wrench, install the wrench barinto the jack as shown in the drawing.To raise the vehicle, turn the wheel nutwrench clockwise. As the jack beginsto raise the vehicle, double check thatit is properly positioned and will not slip.If the jack is on soft ground or sand,place a board, brick, flat stone or otherobject under the base of the jack tokeep it from sinking.

WARNING:Do not get under the car when it issupported by the jack! This is verydangerous as the vehicle could falland cause serious injury or death.No one should stay in the car whilethe jack is being used.

D060G02Y-AAT

6. Changing Wheels

Loosen the wheel nuts and removethem with your fingers. Slide the wheeloff the studs and lay it flat so it cannotroll away. To put the wheel on the hub,pick up the spare tire, line up the holeswith the studs and slide the wheel ontothem. If this is difficult, tip the wheelslightly and get the top hole in the wheellined up with the top stud. Then jigglethe wheel back and forth until the wheelcan be slid over the other studs.

HNF4025

Wrench barWheel nutwrench

D060G01NF-A


9

!WARNING:

Wheels and wheel covers may havesharp edges. Handle them carefullyto avoid possible severe injury. Be-fore putting the wheel into place, besure that there is nothing on the hubor wheel (such as mud, tar, gravel,etc.) that interferes with the wheelfrom fitting solidly against the hub.

D060G02NF

!D060H02O-AAT

7. Reinstall Wheel Nuts

To reinstall the wheel, hold it on thestuds, put the wheel nuts on the studsand tighten them finger tight. The nutsshould be installed with their small di-ameter ends directed inward. Jiggle thetire to be sure it is completely seated,then tighten the nuts as much as pos-sible with your fingers again.

If there is, remove it. If there is notgood contact on the mounting sur-face between the wheel and hub, thewheel nuts could come loose andcause the loss of a wheel. Loss of awheel may result in loss of control ofthe vehicle. This may cause seriousinjury or death.

WARNING:

D060H01NF-A

310


D060I01E-AAT

8. Lower Vehicle and Tighten Nuts

D060J02O-AAT

After Changing Wheels

Lower the car to the ground by turningthe wheel nut wrench counterclock-wise.

If you have a tire gauge, remove thevalve cap and check the air pressure. Ifthe pressure is lower than recom-mended, drive slowly to the nearestservice station and inflate to the correctpressure. If it is too high, adjust it until

Then position the wrench as shown inthe drawing and tighten the wheel nuts.Be sure the socket is seated com-pletely over the nut. Do not stand on thewrench handle or use an extension pipeover the wrench handle.Go around the wheel tightening everyother nut until they are all tight. Thendouble-check each nut for tightness.After changing wheels, have a techni-cian tighten the wheel nuts to theirproper torque as soon as possible.

Wheel nut tightening torque:Steel wheel & aluminium alloy wheel:65-80 lb.ft (900-1,100 kg.cm)

D060I01NF

HNF4013-A

HNF5016-A


11

it is correct. Always reinstall the valvecap after checking or adjusting tirepressure. If the cap is not replaced, airmay leak from the tire. If you lose avalve cap, buy another and install it assoon as possible.After you have changed wheels, al-ways secure the flat tire in its place andreturn the jack and tools to their properstorage locations.

IF YOUR VEHICLE MUST BETOWED

D080A01O-GAT

If your vehicle has to be towed, it should be doneby your Hyundai dealer or a commercial towtruck service. This will help assure that yourvehicle is not damaged in towing. Also, profes-sionals are generally aware of local laws gov-erning towing. In any case, rather than riskdamage to your car, it is suggested that youshow this information to the tow truck operator.Be sure that a safety chain system is used andthat all local laws are observed.It is recommended that your vehicle be towedwith a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipmentwith all the wheels off the ground.

! CAUTION:o Your vehicle can be damaged if towed

incorrectly!o Be sure the transaxle is in neutral.o When the engine will not start, be sure

the steering is unlocked by placing thekey in the "ACC" position.

D080B01O-GAT

Towing the Vehicle

HNF4015

Your vehicle can be towed by wheel lift typetruck (1), (2) or flatbed equipment (3).

1)

2)

3) dolly

312


CAUTION:o When towing the vehicle, take care not to

cause damage to the bumper or under-body of the vehicle.

!

!

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

2) If any of the loaded wheels or suspensioncomponents are damaged or the vehicle isbeing towed with the front wheels on theground, use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

o Manual Transaxle:If you do not use a towing dolly, place theignition key in the "ACC" position and put thetransaxle in "N (Neutral)".

D080B02NF

CAUTION:Do not tow with the key removed or in the"LOCK" position when towing from therear without a towing dolly.

D080B01NF

!

o Do not tow with sling type truck as thismay cause damage to the bumper orunderbody of the vehicle.

1) If the vehicle is being towed with the rearwheels on the ground, be sure the parkingbrake is released.

CAUTION:

o Automatic Transaxle:Be sure to use a towing dolly under the frontwheels.

A vehicle with an automatic transaxle shouldnever be towed from the rear with the frontwheels on the ground. This can cause se-rious damage to the transaxle.

3) It is recommended that your vehicle betowed with all the wheels off the ground.


13EMERGENCY TOWING

D080D01NF-AAT

!

D080D02NF-A

For emergency towing when no commercialtow vehicle is available, attach a tow cable,chain or strap to the towing hook under the frontof your car. Do not attempt to tow your vehiclein this manner on any unpaved surface. Thiscould result in serious damage to your car.Nor should towing be attempted if the wheels,drive train, axles, steering or brakes are dam-aged. Before towing, be sure the transaxle is inneutral and the key is in "ACC" (with the engineoff) or in the "ON" position (with the enginerunning). A driver must be in the towed car tosteer it and operate the brakes.

CAUTION:If the car is being towed with all four wheelson the ground, it can be towed only from thefront. Be sure that the transaxle is in neutral.Do not tow at speeds greater than 30 mph(50 km/h) and for more than 15 miles (25km). Be sure the steering is unlocked byplacing the key in the "ACC" position. Adriver must be in the towed vehicle tooperate the steering and brakes.

NOTE:Before towing, check the level of the auto-matic transaxle fluid. If it is below the "HOT"range on the dipstick, add fluid. If youcannot add fluid, a towing dolly must beused.

IF YOU LOSE YOUR KEYS

D120A01A-AAT

If you lose your keys, many Hyundai dealerscan make you a new key if you have your keynumber.If you lock the keys inside your car and youcannot obtain a new key, many Hyundai dealerscan use special tools to open the door for you.

4Corrosion Protection ..................................................... 4-2To Help Prevent Corrosion ........................................... 4-2Washing and Waxing .................................................... 4-3Cleaning the Interior ...................................................... 4-5

CORROSION PREVENTION & APPEARANCE CARE

4

4 CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

2 CORROSION PROTECTION

E020B01A-AAT

Keep Your Car Clean

The best way to prevent corrosion is to keepyour car clean and free of corrosive materials.Attention to the underside of the car is particu-larly important.

o If you live in a high-corrosion area — whereroad salts are used, near the ocean, areaswith industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.—, youshould take extra care to prevent corrosion.In winter, hose off the underside of your carat least once a month and be sure to cleanthe underside thoroughly when winter isover.

o When cleaning underneath the car, giveparticular attention to the components underthe fenders and other areas that are hiddenfrom view. Do a thorough job; just dampeningthe accumulated mud rather than washing itaway will accelerate corrosion rather thanprevent it. Water under high pressure andsteam are particularly effective in removingaccumulated mud and corrosive materials.

E020A01A-AAT

You can help prevent corrosion from gettingstarted by observing the following:

E010D01A-AAT

Moisture Breeds Corrosion

Moisture creates the conditions in which corro-sion is most likely to occur. For example, cor-rosion is accelerated by high humidity, particu-larly when temperatures are just above freez-ing. In such conditions, the corrosive material iskept in contact with the car surfaces by mois-ture that is slow to evaporate.Mud is particularly corrosive because it is slowto dry and holds moisture in contact with thevehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, itcan still retain the moisture and promote corro-sion.High temperatures can also accelerate corro-sion of parts that are not properly ventilated sothe moisture can be dispersed. For all thesereasons, it is particularly important to keep yourcar clean and free of mud or accumulations ofother materials. This applies not only to thevisible surfaces but particularly to the undersideof the car.

E010C01A-AAT

High-Corrosion Areas

If you live in an area where your car is regularlyexposed to corrosive materials, corrosion pro-tection is particularly important. Some of thecommon causes of accelerated corrosion areroad salts, dust control chemicals, ocean airand industrial pollution.

E010B01A-AAT

Common Causes of Corrosion

The most common causes of corrosion on yourcar are:

o Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed toaccumulate underneath the car.

o Removal of paint or protective coatings bystones, gravel, abrasion or minor scrapesand dents which leave unprotected metalexposed to corrosion.

E010A01A-AAT

Protecting Your Hyundai from Corro-sion

By using the most advanced design and con-struction practices to combat corrosion,Hyundai produces cars of the highest quality.However, this is only part of the job. To achievethe long-term corrosion resistance yourHyundai can deliver, the owner's cooperationand assistance is also required.

TO HELP PREVENT CORROSION

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

3WASHING AND WAXING

E020E01A-AAT

Don't Neglect the Interior

Moisture can collect under the floor mats andcarpeting to cause corrosion. Check under themats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry.Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, clean-ing materials or chemicals in the car.These should be carried only in proper contain-ers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up,flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried.

E020C01A-AAT

Keep Your Garage Dry

Don't park your car in a damp, poorly ventilatedgarage. This creates a favorable environmentfor corrosion. This is particularly true if youwash your car in the garage or drive it into thegarage when it is still wet or covered with snow,ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contrib-ute to corrosion unless it is well ventilated somoisture is dispersed.

E030A01A-AAT

Washing Your Hyundai

Never wash your car when the surface is hotfrom being in the sun. Always wash your car inthe shade.

Wash your car frequently. Dirt is abrasive andcan scratch the paint if it is not removed. Airpollution or acid rain may damage the paint andtrim through chemical action if pollutants areallowed to remain in contact with the surface. Ifyou live near the ocean or in an area where roadsalts or dust control chemicals are used, youshould pay particular attention to the undersideof the car. Start by rinsing the car to remove dustand loose dirt. In winter, or if you have driventhrough mud or muddy water, be sure to thor-oughly clean the underside as well. Use a harddirect stream of water to remove accumulationsof mud or corrosive materials. Use a goodquality car-washing solution and follow themanufacturer's directions on the package.These are available at your Hyundai dealer orauto parts outlet. Don't use strong householddetergents, gasoline, strong solvents or abra-sive cleaning powders as these may damagethe finish.Use a clean sponge or cloth, rinse it frequentlyand don't damage the finish by rubbing too hard.For stubborn spots, dampen them frequentlyand remove them a little at a time.

o When cleaning lower door panels, rockerpanels and frame members, be sure thatdrain holes are kept open so that moisturecan escape and not be trapped inside to ac-celerate corrosion.

E020D02A-AAT

Keep Paint and Trim in Good Condition

Scratches or chips in the finish should becovered with "touch-up" paint as soon as pos-sible to reduce the possibility of corrosion. Ifbare metal is showing through, the attention ofa qualified body and paint shop is recommended.

Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly cor-rosive and may damage painted surfaces in justa few hours. Always remove bird droppings assoon as possible.


4

E030D01A-AAT

When to Wax Again

You should polish and wax the car again whenwater no longer beads on a clean surface butspreads out over a larger area.

E030C01A-AAT

Polishing and Waxing

Always wash and dry the car before polishingor waxing or using a combination cleaner andwax. Use a good quality commercial productand follow the manufacturer's directions on thecontainer. Polish and wax the bright trim piecesas well as the paint.

E030B01A-AAT

Spot Cleaning

Don't use gasoline, strong solvents or corro-sive cleaning agents. These can damage thefinish of the car. To remove road tar, useturpentine on a clean, soft cloth. Be gentle.To remove dead insects or tree sap, use warmwater and mild soap or car-washing solution.Soak the spot and rub gently. If the paint has lostits luster, use a commercial car-cleaning polish.

If you find any nicks or scratches in the paint,use touch-up paint to cover them to preventcorrosion. To protect the paintwork of the caragainst corrosion, you must clean your Hyundai(at least once a month). Give special attentionto the removal of salt, mud and other sub-stances on the underside of the splashboardsof the car. Make sure that the outlets and theunderside of the doors are open. Paint damagecan be caused by small accumulation of tar,industrial precipitation, tree resin, insects andbird droppings, when not removed immediately.If water alone is not strong enough to remove theaccumulated dirt, use a mild car washing solu-tion. Be sure to rinse the surface after washingto remove the solution. Never allow the solutionto dry on the painted surfaces.

To clean whitewall tires, use a stiff brush orsoapy steel-wool scouring pad.

To clean plastic wheel covers, use a cleansponge or soft cloth and water.

To clean cast aluminum alloy wheels, use a mildsoap or neutral detergent. Do not use abrasivecleaners. Protect the bare-metal surfaces bycleaning, polishing and waxing. Because alumi-num is subject to corrosion, be sure to givealuminum alloy wheels special attention in win-ter. If you drive on salted roads, clean thewheels thoroughly afterwards.

After washing, be sure to rinse thoroughly. Ifsoapy water dries on the finish, streaking willresult.

When the weather is warm and the humidity low,you may find it necessary to rinse each sectionimmediately after washing to avoid streaking.

After rinsing, dry the car using a damp chamoisor soft, absorbent cloth. The reason for dryingthe car is to remove water from the car so it willdry without water spots. Don't rub, this candamage the finish.

4CORROSION PREVENTION AND APPEARANCE CARE

5CLEANING THE INTERIOR

E040B01A-AAT

To Clean the Leather Upholstery(If Installed)

In the normal course of use, leather upholsteredsurfaces will, like any material, pick-up dust anddirt. This dust and dirt must be cleaned off or itmay work into the surface of the leather, caus-ing damage.

Fine leather needs care, and should be cleanedwhen necessary. Washing leather thoroughlywith soap and water will keep your leatherlustrous, beautiful and ensure you have manyyears of wear.Take a piece of cheese cloth and using any mildsoap and lukewarm water, work up a goodlather. Thoroughly wash the leather. Wipe cleanwith a slightly damp cloth and dry with soft cloth.Do this as often as the leather becomes soiled.

During tanning operations, sufficient oils areincorporated through processing that none needbe applied during the life of the leather. Oilapplied to the finished surface will in no way helpthe leather and may do more harm than good.Varnishes and furniture polishes should neverbe used under any conditions.

E040A01A-AAT

To Clean the Vinyl Upholstery

To clean the vinyl upholstery, first remove loosedirt and dust with a vacuum cleaner. Then applya solution of mild soap or detergent and waterusing a clean sponge or soft cloth. Allow this tostay on the surface to loosen the dirt, then wipewith a clean damp sponge or cloth. If all the dirtstains are not removed, repeat this procedureuntil the upholstery is clean. Do not use gaso-line, solvent, paint thinner or other strong clean-ers.

E030E01A-AAT

Maintaining Bumpers

Special precautions must be observed to pre-serve the appearance of the bumpers on yourHyundai. They are:

o Be careful not to spill battery electrolyte orhydraulic brake fluid on the bumpers. If youdo, wash it off immediately with clean water.

o Be gentle when cleaning the bumper sur-faces. They are made of soft plastic and thesurface can be damaged if mistreated. Donot use abrasive cleaners. Use warm waterand mild soap or car-washing solution.

o Do not expose the bumpers to high tem-peratures. For example, if you have your carrepainted, do not leave the bumpers on thecar if the car is going to be placed in a high-temperature paint booth.


6 ANY QUESTIONS?

E040D01A-AAT

Cleaning the Seat Belts

To clean the seat belts, use a cloth or spongewith mild soap or detergent and warm water. Donot use strong detergents, dye, bleach or abra-sive materials on the seat belts as this mayweaken the fabric.While cleaning the belts, inspect them for ex-cessive wear, cuts, fraying or other signs ofdamage and replace them if necessary.

E040C01A-AAT

Cleaning the Carpets

Use a foam-type carpet cleaner. Cleaners ofthis type are available in aerosol cans in liquidform or powder. Read the instructions andfollow them exactly. Using a vacuum cleanerwith the appropriate attachment, remove asmuch dirt from the carpets as possible. Applythe foam following the manufacturer's direc-tions, then rub in overlapping circles. Do not addwater. These cleaners work best when thecarpet is kept as dry as possible.

E050A01A-AAT

If you have any questions about the care of yourcar, consult your Hyundai dealer.

E040E01A-AAT

Cleaning the Windows

You may use any household window cleaner onthe windows. However, when cleaning the in-side of the rear window be careful not to damagethe rear window defroster wiring.

5Maintenance Intervals ................................................... 5-2Scheduled Maintenance ................................................ 5-4Maintenance under Severe Usage Conditions ............. 5-6Explanation of Scheduled Maintenance Items .............. 5-7

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

5

5 VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

2

F010C01A-AAT

Specified Scheduled Procedures

These are the procedures such as inspections,adjustments and replacements that are listed inthe maintenance charts starting on page 5-4.These procedures must be performed at theintervals shown in the maintenance schedule toassure that your warranty remains in effect.Although it is strongly recommended that theybe performed by the trained technicians at yourHyundai dealer, these procedures may be per-formed at any qualified service facility.It is suggested that genuine Hyundai serviceparts be used for any required repairs or re-placements. Other parts of equivalent qualitysuch as engine oil, engine coolant, manual orauto transaxle oil, brake fluid and so on whichare not supplied by Hyundai Motor Company orits distributor may be used without affectingyour warranty coverage but you should alwaysbe sure these are equivalent to the quality of theoriginal Hyundai parts. Your Owner's Hand-book provides further information about yourwarranty coverage.

F010A01A-AAT

Service Requirements

To ensure that you receive the greatest numberof miles of satisfying operation from your Hyundai,certain maintenance procedures must be per-formed. Although careful design and engineer-ing have reduced these to a minimum, those thatare required are of the utmost importance.It is your responsibility to have these mainte-nance procedures performed to comply withthe terms of the warranties covering your newHyundai. The Owner's Handbook supplied withyour new vehicle provides further informationabout these warranties.

F010B01A-AAT

Maintenance Requirements

The maintenance required for your Hyundaican be divided into three main areas:

o Specified scheduled procedureso General checkso Do-it-yourself maintenance

MAINTENANCE INTERVALS

5VEHICLE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

3SCHEDULED MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS

F020A02Y-AAT

o Inspection should be performed any time amalfunction is experienced or suspected.

o Receipts for all emission control systemservices should be retained to demonstratecompliance with conditions of the emissionssystem warranty.

o After 120 months or 150,000 miles (240,000km), continue to follow the prescribed main-tenance intervals.

o For severe usage maintenance require-ments, see page 5-6 of this section.

F010D02A-AAT

General Checks

These are the regular checks you should per-form when you drive your Hyundai or you fill thefuel tank. A list of these items will be found onpage 6-4.

F010E01A-AAT

Do-It-Yourself Maintenance

If you are mechanically inclined, own a few toolsthat are required and want to take the time to doso, you can inspect and service a number ofitems. For more information about doing it your-self, see Section 6.

F010F01A-AAT

A Few Tips

o Whenever you have your Hyundai serviced,keep copies of the service records in yourglove box. This will help ensure that you candocument that the required procedures havebeen performed to keep your warranties ineffect. This is especially important whenservice is not performed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

o If you choose to do your own maintenanceand repairs, you may find it helpful to havean official Hyundai Shop Manual. A copy ofthis publication may be purchased at yourHyundai dealer's parts department.


4 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

F030B03NF-AAT

R :Replace I : Inspect and, after Inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary.

F030A01NF-AAT

The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission servicesto protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.

DESCRIPTION

EMISSION CONTROL ITEMS

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

FUEL FILTER

FUEL LINES, FUEL HOSES AND CONNECTIONS

VACUUM AND CRANKCASE VENTILATION HOSES

VAPOR HOSE AND FUEL FILLER CAP

AIR CLEANER FILTER

VALVE CLEARANCE

SPARK PLUGS (IRIDIUM COATED)

FUEL TANK AIR FILTER

ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

R

I

I

15

24

12

R

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

R

I

I

30

48

24

R

I

I

I

R

R

37.5

60

30

R

R

I

I

45

72

36

R

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

R

I

I

I

60

96

48

R

I

I

I

R

I

R

67.5

108

54

R

I

I

75

120

60

R

R

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

R

I

I

90

144

72

R

I

I

I

R

R

97.5

156

78

R

I

I

R

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

R

R

I

I

120

192

96

R

I

I

I

R

I

R

127.5

204

102

R

I

I

135

216

108

R

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

R

I

I

150

240

120

R

R

I

I

I

R

R


5

See Note *1

See Note *2

F030C01NF-AAT

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

GENERAL ITEMS

DRIVE BELT (AUTO-TENSIONER, ALT, P/STR'G, A/CON, W/PUMP)

COOLANT

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

BRAKE FLUID

BRAKE HOSES AND LINES

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

EXHAUST PIPE AND MUFFLER

SUSPENSION MOUNTING BOLTS

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS / LOWER ARM

BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

POWER STEERING PUMP, BELT AND HOSES

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

AIR CONDITIONING REFRIGERANT

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

No. DESCRIPTION

MILES X 1000

KILOMETERS X 1000

MONTHS

7.5

12

6

I

I

15

24

12

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

22.5

36

18

I

I

30

48

24

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

37.5

60

30

I

I

45

72

36

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

52.5

84

42

I

I

60

96

48

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

67.5

108

54

I

I

75

120

60

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

82.5

132

66

I

I

90

144

72

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

97.5

156

78

I

I

105

168

84

R

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

112.5

180

90

I

I

120

192

96

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

127.5

204

102

I

I

135

216

108

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

142.5

228

114

I

I

150

240

120

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

I

Note:

*1. FOR THE FIRST TIME, REPLACE THE COOLANT AT 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM) OR 60 MONTHS.AFTER THAT, REPLACE IT EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM) OR 24 MONTHS.

*2. FOR EVERY 12 MONTHS OR 10,000 MILES (15,000 KM), WHICHEVER OCCURS FIRST : "R"


6 MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5miles (8km) in normaltemperature or less than 10miles (16km) in freezing temperature

B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distancesC - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt- spread roadsD - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weatherE - Driving in sandy areas

F040A01NF-AAT

The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions. Refer to the chart below for the appropriatemaintenance intervals.

R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary

F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)G - Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roadH - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rackI - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or vehicle towingJ - Driving over 100 MPH (170 Km/h)K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions

ENGINE OIL AND FILTER

AIR CLEANER FILTER

SPARK PLUGS

BRAKE PADS, CALIPERS AND ROTORS

REAR BRAKE DRUMS/LININGS, PARKING BRAKE

STEERING GEAR BOX, LINKAGE & BOOTS/

LOWER ARM BALL JOINT, UPPER ARM BALL JOINT

DRIVE SHAFTS AND BOOTS

MANUAL TRANSAXLE OIL

AIR CONDITIONER FILTER (FOR EVAPORATOR AND BLOWER UNIT)

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID

MAINTENANCE ITEM

R

I

R

I

I

I

I

R

R

R

EVERY 3,000 MILES (4,800 KM) OR 3 MONTHS

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 7,500 MILES (12,000 KM) OR 6 MONTHS

EVERY 60,000 MILES (96,000 KM)

MORE FREQUENTLY

EVERY 30,000 MILES (48,000 KM)

DRIVINGCONDITION

MAINTENANCEINTERVALS

MAINTENANCEOPERATION

A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, K

C, E

B, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, G, H

C, D, E, F, G, H, I

C, D, E, F

A, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J

C, E

A, C, E, F, G, H, I


7

F060D01A-AAT

o Fuel Lines, Fuel Hoses and Connec-tions

Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Have a trainedtechnician replace any damaged or leakingparts immediately.

F060B01NF-GAT

o Drive Belts

Inspect all drive belts for evidence of cuts,cracks, excessive wear or oil saturation andreplace if necessary. Drive belts should bechecked periodically for proper tension.

F060M01A-AAT

o Engine Oil and Filter

The engine oil and filter should be changed at theintervals specified in the maintenance sched-ule. If the car is being driven in severe condi-tions, more frequent oil and filter changes arerequired.

F060C01A-AAT

o Fuel Filter

A clogged filter can limit the speed at which thevehicle may be driven, damage the emissionsystem and cause hard starting. If an exces-sive amount of foreign matter accumulates inthe fuel tank, the filter may require replacementmore frequently.After installing a new filter, run the engine forseveral minutes, and check for leaks at theconnections. Fuel filters should be installed bytrained technicians.

F060F01A-AAT

o Vacuum, Crankcase VentilationHoses

Inspect the surface of hoses for evidence ofheat and/or mechanical damage. Hard andbrittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions,and excessive swelling indicate deterioration.Particular attention should be paid to examinethose hose surfaces nearest to high heatsources, such as the exhaust manifold.Inspect the hose routing to assure that thehoses do not come in contact with any heatsource, sharp edges or moving componentwhich might cause heat damage or mechanicalwear. Inspect all hose connections, such asclamps and couplings, to make sure they aresecure, and that no leaks are present. Hosesshould be replaced immediately if there is anyevidence of deterioration or damage.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS


8

F070G02A-AAT

o Brake Fluid

Check brake fluid level in the brake fluid reser-voir. The level should be between "MIN" and"MAX" marks on the side of the reservoir. Useonly hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3or DOT 4.

F070F01A-AAT

o Brake Hoses and Lines

Visually check for proper installation, chafing,cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replaceany deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-ately.

F070E06A-AAT

o Automatic Transaxle Fluid

The fluid level should be in the “HOT” range ofthe dipstick, after the engine and transaxle areat normal operating temperature. Check theautomatic transaxle fluid level with the enginerunning and the transaxle in neutral, with theparking brake properly applied. Use HYUNDAIGENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SKATF SP III or other brands meeting the SP IIIspecification approved by Hyundai Motor Co.when adding or changing fluid. Using the wrongATF may result in damage to the ATM.

F070H01A-AAT

o Rear Brake Drums and Linings/Parking Brake

Check the rear brake drums and linings forscoring, burning, leaking fluid, broken parts,and excessive wear. Inspect the parking brakesystem including the parking brake lever andcables. For detailed service procedures, referto the Shop Manual.

F070C01A-AAT

o Coolant

The coolant should be changed at the intervalsspecified in the maintenance schedule.

F060J01A-AAT

o Spark Plugs

Make sure to install new spark plugs of thecorrect heat range.

F060H01A-AAT

o Air Cleaner Filter

A Genuine Hyundai air cleaner filter is recom-mended when the filter is replaced.

F060G01A-AAT

o Vapor Hose and Fuel Filler Cap

The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should beinspected at those intervals specified in themaintenance schedule. Make sure that a newvapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly re-placed. F070D01A-AAT

o Manual Transaxle Oil

Inspect the manual transaxle oil according tothe maintenance schedule.

NOTE:If the oil level is low, check for possible leaksbefore adding oil. Do not overfill.

F060N02E-AAT

o Valve Clearance

Inspect excessive valve noise and/or enginevibration and adjust if necessary. A qualifiedtechnician should perform the operation.


9

F070L01A-AAT

o Suspension Mounting Bolts

Check the suspension connections for loose-ness or damage. Retighten to the specifiedtorque.

F070K01A-AAT

o Exhaust Pipe and Muffler

Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler andhangers for cracks, deterioration, or damage.Start the engine and listen carefully for anyexhaust gas leakage. Tighten connections orreplace parts as necessary.

F070J01A-AAT

o Brake Pads, Calipers and Rotors

Check the pads for excessive wear, discs forrun out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage.

F070Q01A-AAT

o Air Conditioning Refrigerant

Check the air conditioning lines and connec-tions for leakage and damage. Check air con-ditioning performance according to the relevantshop manual if necessary.

F070P01A-AAT

o Drive Shafts and Boots

Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps forcracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace anydamaged parts and, if necessary, repack thegrease.

F070N01A-AAT

o Power Steering Pump, Belt and Hoses

Check the power steering pump and hoses forleakage and damage. Replace any damaged orleaking parts immediately. Inspect the powersteering belt for evidence of cuts, cracks, ex-cessive wear, oiliness and proper tension.Replace or adjust it if necessary.

F070M01Y-AAT

o Steering Gear Box, Linkage & Boots/Lower Arm Ball Joint, Upper Arm BallJoint

With the vehicle stopped and engine off, checkfor excessive free-play in the steering wheel.Check the linkage for bends or damage. Checkthe dust boots and ball joints for deterioration,cracks, or damage. Replace any damagedparts.

6Engine Compartment .................................................... 6-2General Checks ............................................................ 6-4Checking the Engine Oil ............................................... 6-5Changing the Engine Oil and Filter ................................ 6-6Checking and Changing the Engine Coolant ................ 6-8Spark Plugs ................................................................ 6-11Changing the Air Cleaner Filter ................................... 6-14Checking the Transaxle Oil (Manual) ......................... 6-17Checking the Transaxle Fluid (Automatic) .................. 6-18Checking the Brakes .................................................. 6-20Air Conditioning Care .................................................. 6-21Changing the Air Conditioner Filter ............................. 6-22Checking Drive Belts .................................................. 6-24Checking and Replacing Fuses .................................. 6-25Checking the Battery .................................................. 6-27Power Steering Fluid Level ......................................... 6-29Headlight Aiming Adjustment ...................................... 6-30Replacement of Light Bulbs ........................................ 6-31Bulb Wattages ............................................................. 6-38Fuse Panel Description ............................................... 6-39

DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

6

6 DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

2

G010B01NF-AAT

(2.4 DOHC)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

G010B01NF

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objects carefullyso that the plastic cover of theengine is not damaged.

!

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Air cleaner4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse and relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Automatic transaxle oil leveldipstick (If Installed)

10. Radiator cap11. Battery

6DO-IT-YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

3

G010A01NF-AAT

(3.3 V6)

G010A01NF

CAUTION:When inspecting or servicing theengine, you should handle toolsand other heavy objects carefullyso that the plastic cover of theengine is not damaged.

!

1. Coolant reservoir cap2. Engine oil filler cap3. Air cleaner4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Fuse and relay box6. Windshield washer fluid reservoir7. Power steering fluid reservoir8. Engine oil level dipstick

9. Automatic transaxle oil level dipstick10. Radiator cap11. Battery


4

G020C01A-AAT

Vehicle Interior

The following should be checked each timewhen the vehicle is driven:

o Lights operationo Windshield wiper operationo Horn operationo Defroster, heating system operation (and air

conditioning, if installed)o Steering operation and conditiono Mirror condition and operationo Turn signal operationo Accelerator pedal operationo Brake operation, including parking brakeo Manual transaxle operation, including clutch

operationo Automatic transaxle operation, including

"Park" mechanism operationo Seat control condition and operationo Seat belt condition and operationo Sun visor operation

If you notice anything that does not operatecorrectly or appears to be functioning correctly,inspect it carefully and seek assistance fromyour Hyundai dealer if service is needed.

G020B01A-AAT

Vehicle Exterior

The following should be checked monthly:

o Overall appearance and conditiono Wheel condition and wheel nut torqueo Exhaust system conditiono Light condition and operationo Windshield glass conditiono Wiper blade conditiono Paint condition and body corrosiono Fluid leakso Door and hood lock conditiono Tire pressure and condition

(including spare tire)

GENERAL CHECKS

G020A01NF-AAT

Engine Compartment

The following should be checked regularly:

o Engine oil level and conditiono Transaxle fluid level and conditiono Brake fluid levelo Engine coolant levelo Windshield washer fluid levelo Accessory drive belt conditiono Engine coolant hose conditiono Fluid leaks (on or below components)o Power steering fluid levelo Battery conditiono Air filter conditiono Engine vibration


5

G030C01JM-AAT

To Check the Oil Level

Before checking the oil, warm up the engine tothe normal operating temperature and be sureyour car is parked on level ground. Turn theengine off.

Wait five minutes, then remove the dipstick,wipe it off, fully reinsert the dipstick and withdrawit again. Then note the highest level the oil hasreached on the dipstick. It should be betweenthe upper ("F") and lower ("L") range.

!WARNING:

Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when checking the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL

G030B01O-AAT

Recommended Oil

G030C01NF

The engine oil quality should meet the followingclassification.

API SJ, SL or ABOVE,ILSAC GF-3 or ABOVE

G030B01JM-U

G030C02NF(2.4L)

(3.3L)NOTE:o For good fuel economy, SAE 5W-20 (5W-

30), ILSAC GF-3 engine oil is preferredregardless of regional option and en-gine variation.

o If SAE 5W-20, ILSAC GF-3 engine oil isnot available, secondary recommendedengine oil for corresponding tempera-ture range can be used.

G030A01A-AAT

Engine oil is essential to the performance andservice of the engine. It is suggested that youcheck the oil level at least once a week in normaluse and more often if you are on a trip or drivingin severe conditions.


6

!

!

G030D01O-AAT

Adding Oil1. Remove the oil filler cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.2. Add oil, then check the level again. Do not

overfill.3. Replace the cap by turning it clockwise.

The distance between the "F" and "L" marks isequal to about 1 quart of oil.

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil into afunnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage tothe engine.

WARNING:Be very careful not to touch the radiatorhose when adding the engine oil as it maybe hot enough to burn you.

If the oil level is close to or below the "L" mark,add oil until it reaches the "F" mark. To add oil:

G030D01NF

G030D02NF

(3.3L)

(2.4L)

CHANGING THE ENGINE OIL ANDFILTER

G040A01NF-AAT

HNF5005

(3.3L)

(2.4L)

G040A01NF

Oil filter

Oil fillercap

Oil leveldipstick

Oil fillercap

Oil filter


7

!

3. Slide underneath the car and loosen thedrain plug by turning it counterclockwise witha wrench of the proper size. Be sure that adrain pan is in position to catch the oil as itdrains out, then remove the drain plug.

4. When the oil has stopped draining, replacethe drain plug using a new gasket and re-tighten by turning it clockwise.

Oil pan drain plug tightening torque:25.3 ~ 32.5 lb.ft (3.5 ~ 4.5 kgf.m)

HNF5006-1

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

The engine oil and filter should be changed atthose intervals specified in the maintenanceschedule in Section 5. If the car is being drivenin severe conditions, more frequent oil and filterchanges are required.

The procedure for changing the oil and filter isas follows:

1. Park the car on level ground and set theparking brake. Start the engine and let itwarm up until the needle on the coolanttemperature gauge moves above the lowestmark. Turn the engine off and place the gearselector lever in "P" (automatic) or reversegear (manual transaxle).

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oilfiller cap.

NOTE:Loosen the oil filter cap by turning it coun-terclockwise to drain well the oil in the oilfilter (3.3L only).

WARNING:Be very careful when draining the engine oilas it may be hot enough to burn you!

HNF5005-1

G040B01NF


8 CHECKING AND CHANGING THEENGINE COOLANT

!

G050A01A-AAT

WARNING:Do not remove the radiator cap when theengine is hot. When the engine is hot, theengine coolant is under pressure and mayerupt through the opening if the cap isremoved. You could be seriously burned ifyou do not observe this precaution. Do notremove the radiator cap until the radiator iscool to the touch.

!

5. Remove the oil filter by turning it counter-clockwise with a oil filter wrench of the propersize. A certain amount of oil will come outwhen you remove the filter. So be sure tohave your drain pan in place underneath it.

6. Install a new oil filter in accordance with theinstructions on the carton or on the filter itself.Do not over-tighten.

Tightening torque:8.7 ~ 11.6 lb.ft (1.2 ~ 1.6 kgf.m)

Be sure that the mounting surface on theengine is clean and that the old gasket isremoved completely. Lubricate the newgasket on the filter with clean engine oilbefore installation.

7. Remove the engine oil level dipstick.8. Refill the crankcase with the recommended

engine oil. Refer to the specification in chap-ter 9 for engine oil capacity.

CAUTION:Slowly pour the recommended oil into afunnel. Do not overfill to avoid damage tothe engine.

NOTE:Always dispose of used engine oil in anenvironmentally acceptable manner. It issuggested that it be placed in a sealedcontainer and taken to a service station forreclamation. Do not pour the oil on theground or put it into the household trash.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Used engine oil may cause irritation orcancer of the skin if left in contact with theskin for prolonged periods of time. Usedengine oil contains chemicals that havecaused cancer in laboratory animals. Al-ways protect your skin by washing yourhands thoroughly with soap and warmwater as soon as possible after handlingused oil.

!

9. Start the engine and check to be sure no oilis leaking from the drain plug or oil filter.

10.Shut off the engine and recheck the oil level.


9

G050B01A-AAT

Recommended Engine Coolant

Use a high quality ethylene-glycol coolant in a50/50 mix with water. The engine coolant shouldbe compatible with aluminum engine parts.Additional corrosion inhibitors or additives shouldnot be used. The cooling system must bemaintained with the correct concentration andtype of engine coolant to prevent freezing andcorrosion. Never allow the concentration ofantifreeze to exceed the 60% level or go belowthe 35% level, or damage to the cooling systemmay result. For proper concentration whenadding or replacing the engine coolant, refer tothe following table.

Ambient

temperature

°F (°C)

5 (-15)

-13 (-25)

-31 (-35)

-49 (-45)

65%

60%

50%

40%

35%

40%

50%

60%

WaterAntifreeze

solution

Engine Coolant concentration

G050C01NF-GAT

To Check the Coolant Level

The coolant level can be seen on the side of theplastic coolant reservoir. The level of the cool-ant should be between the "L" and "F" lines onthe reservoir when the engine is warm with it atidle . If the level is below the "L" mark, add enginecoolant to bring it up to "F". If the level is low,inspect for coolant leaks and recheck the fluidlevel frequently. If the level drops again, visityour Hyundai dealer for an inspection anddiagnosis of the reason.

G050C01NF

G050D01NF-GAT

To Change the Engine Coolant

The engine coolant should be changed at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.

CAUTION:o Engine coolant can damage the finish of

your car. If you spill engine coolant onthe car, wash it off thoroughly with cleanwater.

o The engine in your vehicle has alumi-num engine parts and must be protectedby an ethylene-glycol base coolant toprevent corrosion and freezing.Do not use hard water. Hard water cancause engine damage from corrosion,overheating or freezing.

!

1. Park the car on level ground, set the parkingbrake and remove the radiator cap whencool.


10

3. Be sure your drain receptacle is in place.Open the drain cock on the radiator. Allow allthe engine coolant to drain from the coolingsystem, and then securely close the draincock.

4. Check Section 9 for the capacity of thecooling system in your car. Then, followingthe manufacturer's directions on the enginecoolant container, add the appropriate quan-tity of coolant to the radiator.

5. Slowly fill the radiator with the proper coolantmixture (see the "Recommended EngineCoolant in previous page) until the fluid levelstays up in the radiator neck. And pump theradiator hose in order to bleed the air.

HNF5008

2. Wrap a thick cloth around the radiator capand slowly turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise without pressing down on it, untilit stops. This relieves any pressure remain-ing in the cooling system. When you are surethat all the pressure has been released,remove the radiator cap by pushing downand turning counterclockwise.

G050D02NF-A G050D01NF

6. Run the engine at idle until the coolant circu-lates. If the cooling fan operates and thecoolant starts to circulate, add the coolant tothe reservoir.

7. To bleed the air in the cooling system, repeatprocedure 6 until the cooling fan operates3~5 times.

8. Replace the radiator cap and turn it untiltightly installed. And then, add coolant to thereservoir until the level is between "L" and"F".

9. Stop the engine and check the coolant levelwhen the engine is cool. The level of thecoolant should be the "L" and "F" lines on thereservoir. If the level is below the "L" line,repeat the procedure 4~8 until the levelbetween "L" and "F".


11

!

!

10.Replace the reservoir cap and check to besure the drain cock and the radiator cap arefully closed and not leaking.

CAUTION:Recheck after a few days and add the cool-ant if the level is below the "L" level.

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the coolant fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

Type

SK16PR-A11

IFR5G-11

SPARK PLUGS

G060A01NF-AAT

G060A01L

Your engine was originally equipped with Iri-dium-tipped spark plugs.Iridium-tipped spark plugs will last longer thanconventional type spark plugs and can beidentified by blue lines on the ceramic shell.

NOTE:Do not clean or regap Iridium-tipped sparkplugs.

G060B01NF-AAT

Replacing the Spark Plugs

The spark plugs should be changed at theintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5 or whenever engineperformance indicates they should be changed.Symptoms that suggest poor spark plug perfor-mance include engine misfiring under load, lossof fuel economy, poor acceleration, etc. Whenspark plugs are replaced, always use sparkplugs recommended by Hyundai. The use ofother spark plugs can result in loss of perfor-mance, radio interference or engine damage.

NOTE:When replacing the spark plugs, always usethe genuine parts recommended.

Recommended Spark Plugs:

0.03

9 ~

0.0

43 in

.(1

.0~

1.1

mm

)

Remark

2.4L

3.3L


12

G060C01NF G060C02NF

3. Remove the cover of the ignition connectorwith a flat-head screwdriver.

4. Pull the ignition connector key in the directionof (1).

5. Press the position (2) of the ignition connec-tor key and detach the ignition connector bypulling it.

(1)

(2)

G060C01NF-GAT

Changing the Spark Plugs

You will find it easier to change spark plugs if theengine is cold. Always change one spark plugat a time. This helps avoid getting the wiresmixed up.

1. Remove the engine cover.

NOTE:It is recommended that the spark plugs for3.3L engines be changed by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

2. Using a clean cloth, remove any dirt that hasaccumulated around the base of the sparkplug so it cannot fall into the cylinder when thespark plug is removed.


13

! WARNING:It is recommended that the engine be coolor cold when changing the spark plugs. Ifthe engine is hot, you could burn yourselfon the insulated connector, the spark plugor the engine itself.

6. Remove the mounting bolt (3) of the ignitioncoil with a socket wrench.

7. Pull straight up on the ignition coil (4).

G060C03NF

8. When preparing to remove the spark plug,guide the socket down over the spark plug,being careful not to damage the ceramicinsulator.

9. To remove the spark plug, turn the wrenchhandle in a counterclockwise direction.

(3)

(4)

G060C06NF G060C05NF

10. To install the new spark plug, guide thesocket down over the spark plug, beingcareful not to damage the ceramic insulator.


14

G060C04NF

11. Installation is the reverse order of disas-sembly.

NOTE:Spark plugs should be tightened firmly.(Tightening torque: 18.0 lb.ft (2.5 kgf.m))Over-tightening can damage the threads inthe aluminum cylinder head. Also, leavingthem too loose can cause the spark plug toget very hot and possibly result in damageto the engine.

CAUTION:o Operating your vehicle without using a

proper air cleaner filter in place can resultin excessive engine wear.

o When removing the air cleaner filter, becareful that dust or dirt does not enterthe air intake. These may result in dam-age to the air cleaner filter.

!

CHANGING THE AIRCLEANER FILTER

G070A03Y-AAT

The replacement of the air cleaner filter isperformed in the following manner.

1. Unsnap the clips around the cover.2. When this is done, the cover can be lifted off,

the old filter removed and the new filter put inits place.

Genuine Hyundai replacement parts are rec-ommended.

HNF5011


15

HHR5048

(1)

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

G080A02A-AAT

The wiper blades should be carefully inspectedfrom time to time and cleaned to remove accu-mulations of road film or other debris. To cleanthe wiper blades and arms, use a clean spongeor cloth with a mild soap or detergent and water.If the wipers continue to streak or smear theglass, replace them with genuine Hyundai re-placement parts or their equivalent.

! CAUTION:o Do not operate the wipers on dry glass.

This can result in more rapid wear of thewiper blades and may scratch the glass.

o Keep the blade rubber out of contactwith petroleum products such as engineoil, gasoline, etc.

G080B01HR-GAT

Replacing the Wiper Blades

To replace the wiper blades, raise the wiper tothe vertical position.

To remove the wiper blade

1. Push down the wiper blade with the lockingclip (1) pressed to detach it from the wiperarm.

G080A01NF-A2. Raise the wiper blade lightly and pull it up.

HHR5049


16

HHR5051

HHR5050

FILLING THE WASHERRESERVOIR

G090A02NF-AAT

G090A02NF

G090A01NF

(3.3L)

(2.4L)To install the wiper blade

1. Put a new wiper blade onto the wiper arm andlower the wiper blade at the level of the wiperarm as shown in the drawing.

2. Pull up the wiper blade until you hear anaudible "click" to engage in the end of thewiper arm.

NOTE:Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against thewindshield.

The washer fluid reservoir supplies fluid to thewindshield washer system.


17

CAUTION:o Radiator antifreeze (engine coolant)

should not be used in the washer systembecause it will damage the car's finish.

o The washer lever should not be pulledand the washer should not be operatedif the washer reservoir is empty. This candamage the washer fluid pump.

!

A good quality washer fluid should be used to fillthe washer reservoir. The fluid level should bechecked more frequently during bad weather orwhenever the washer system is in more fre-quent use.The capacity of the washer reservoir is 3.2 U.S.quarts (4.0 liters).

! WARNING:It is always better to check the transaxle oillevel when the engine is cool or cold. If theengine is hot, you should exercise greatcaution to avoid burning yourself on hotengine or exhaust parts.

CHECKING THE TRANSAXLE OIL(MANUAL)

G100A01NF-AAT

HNF5010

Filler plugDrain plug

Transaxle lubricant in the manual transaxleshould be checked at those intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule in Section5.

Recommended Oil

Use only HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF75W/85 (API GL-4) in the manual transaxle.

Manual Transaxle Oil Capacity

The oil capacity of the manual transaxle is 2.0U.S. quarts (1.9 liters).

!WARNING:

o Windshield washer fluid agents containsome amounts of alcohol and can beflammable under certain circumstances.Do not allow sparks or flame to contactthe washer fluid or the washer fluidreservoir. Damage to the vehicle or itsoccupants could occur.

o Windshield washer fluid is poisonous tohumans and animals. Do not drink wind-shield washer fluid. Serious injury ordeath could occur.


18 CHECKING THE TRANSAXLEFLUID (AUTOMATIC)

G110A01E-AAT

Transaxle fluid in the automatic transaxle shouldbe checked at those intervals specified in thevehicle maintenance schedule in Section 5.

NOTE:Automatic transaxle fluid is basically red incolor. As driving distance increases, thefluid color turns darkish red gradually. It isa normal condition and you should notjudge the need to replace based upon thechanging color.You must replace the automatic transaxlefluid in accordance with intervals specifiedin the vehicle maintenance schedule insection 5.

!

G110B05A-AAT

Recommended FluidYour Hyundai automatic transaxle is speciallydesigned to operate with HYUNDAI GENUINEATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SPIII or other brands meeting the SP III specifica-tion approved by Hyundai Motor Co.. Damagecaused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered byyour new vehicle limited warranty.

CAUTION:Use of aftermarket ATF additives may causedamage to the automatic transaxle.Only use HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III,DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or otherbrands meeting the SP III specification ap-proved by Hyundai Motor Co.. If you arehaving your vehicle serviced at a facilityother than a Hyundai dealer, verify that thecorrect ATF is used for your vehicle.

G100B02A-AAT

To Check the Manual TransaxleFluid Level

G100B01L

Park the car on level ground with the engine off.

1. Using a wrench of the correct size, loosenthe oil filler plug by turning it counterclock-wise and remove it with your fingers.

2. Use your finger to feel inside the hole. The oillevel should be at its bottom edge. If it is not,check for leaks before adding oil. To refill thetransaxle or bring the oil level up, add oilslowly until it reaches the proper level. Do notoverfill.

3. Replace the plug and washer, screw it in withyour fingers and then tighten securely withthe wrench.


19

2. Remove the transaxle dipstick, wipe it clean,reinsert the dipstick as far as it will go, thenremove it again. Now check the fluid level onthe dipstick. It should be in the "HOT" rangeon the dipstick.

G110D02O-AAT

To Check the Transaxle Fluid Level

Park the car on level ground with the parkingbrake engaged. When the transaxle fluid levelis checked, the transaxle fluid should be atnormal operating temperature and the engineidling.

While the engine is idling, apply the brakes andmove the gear selector lever from "P" to eachof its other positions — "R", "N", "D" — and thenreturn to "N" or "P". With the engine still idling:

1. Open the hood, being careful to keep hands,long hair and clothing clear of any movingparts.

!

G110C01NF-AAT

Transaxle Fluid Capacity

The fluid capacity of the automatic transaxle is:

WARNING:The transaxle fluid level should be checkedwhen the engine is at normal operatingtemperature. This means that the engine,radiator, radiator hose, exhaust system etc.,are very hot. Exercise great care not to burnyourself during this procedure.

G110D01NF

C090F02NF

2.4L

3.3L

8.24 U.S. quarts (7.8 liters)

11.52 U.S. quarts (10.9 liters)


20

G110D02NF

CHECKING THE BRAKES

!

G120B01A-AAT

Checking the Brake Fluid Level

WARNING:Use caution when handling brake fluid. Itcan damage your vision if it gets into youreyes. It will also damage your vehicle'spaint if spilled on it and not removed imme-diately.

!WARNING:

The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases, the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

Fluid level should be within "HOT" range

G120A01A-AAT

CAUTION:Because brakes are essential to the safeoperation of the car, it is suggested thatthey be checked and inspected by yourHyundai dealer. The brakes should bechecked and inspected for wear at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle mainte-nance schedule in Section 5.

!

3. If the transaxle fluid level is low, use a funnelto add transaxle fluid through the dipsticktube until the level reaches the "HOT" range.Do not overfill.

G120D01A-AAT

To Check the Fluid Level

The fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir shouldbe checked periodically. The level should bebetween the "MIN" and "MAX" marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at or below the"MIN" mark, carefully add fluid to bring it up to"MAX". Do not overfill.

G120C02A-AAT

Recommended Brake Fluid

Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming toDOT 3 or DOT 4 specifications in your brakingsystem. Follow the instructions printed on thecontainer.


21

G140C01A-AAT

Lubrication

To lubricate the compressor and the seals in thesystem, the air conditioning should be run for atleast 10 minutes each week. This is particularlyimportant during cool weather when the airconditioning system is not otherwise in use.

!

G120E02A-AAT

Adding Brake Fluid

WARNING:Handle brake fluid carefully. It can damageyour vision if it gets into your eyes. Use onlyDOT 3 or DOT 4 specification fluid from asealed container. Do not allow the fluid canor reservoir to remain open any longer thanrequired. This will prevent entry of dirt andmoisture which can damage the brake sys-tem and cause improper operation.

To add brake fluid, first wipe away any dirt thenunscrew the fluid reservoir cap. Slowly pour therecommended fluid into the reservoir. Do notoverfill. Carefully replace the cap on the reser-voir and tighten.

AIR CONDITIONING CARE

!

G140A01A-AAT

Keeping the Condenser Clean

The air conditioning condenser (and engineradiator) should be checked periodically foraccumulation of dirt, dead insects, leaves, etc.These can interfere with maximum cooling ef-ficiency. When removing such accumulations,brush or hose them away carefully to avoidbending the cooling fans.

G140B01A-AAT

Checking the Air Conditioning Opera-tion

1. Start the engine and let it run at a fast idle forseveral minutes with the air conditioning setat the maximum cold setting.

2. If the air coming out of the in-dash vents isnot cold, have the air conditioning systeminspected by your Hyundai dealer.

CAUTION:Running the air conditioning system forextended periods of time with a low refrig-erant level may damage the compressor.

HNF5013


22

3. Lower the glove box down completely bypushing both sides of the glove box inward.

HNF2163

CHANGING THE AIRCONDITIONER FILTER

B145A01NF-AAT

(For Evaporator and Blower Unit)(If Installed)

The air conditioner filter is located in the rightside of the instrument panel.It helps to decrease the amount of pollutantsentering the car.

1. Remove the cover (1) which is located to theright side of the instrument panel by pullingit.

2. Pull the glove box cylinder (2) to unlock theglove box retainer.

HNF2163-1

4. Remove the air conditioner filter cover bypressing both side clips.

HNF2164

CAUTION:Be careful not to damage filter fixing clips.

!


23

1.18 in.(30 mm)

CHECKING THE FREE-PLAY

G150A01A-AAT

STEERING WHEEL

To check the steering wheel free-play, stop thecar with the wheels pointed straight ahead andgently move the steering wheel back and forth.Use very light finger pressure and be sensitiveto changes in resistance that mark the limits ofthe free-play. If the free-play is greater thanspecified, have it inspected by your Hyundaidealer and adjusted or repaired if necessary.

HNF2165

!

5. Replace the air conditioner filter by lifting it.6. Installation is the reverse order of disassem-

bly.

CAUTION:To prevent pollutants from entering the car,be sure to properly install the air condi-tioner filter.

HNF5018

G160A01A-GAT

CLUTCH PEDAL

With the engine off, press lightly on the clutchpedal until you feel a change in resistance. Thisis the clutch pedal free-play. The free-playshould be within the limits specified in the illus-tration. If it is not, have it inspected by yourHyundai dealer and adjusted or repaired ifnecessary.

G160A01HR

0.24~0.51 in.(6~13 mm)


24

G170A01A-AAT

BRAKE PEDAL

With the engine off, press down on the brakepedal several times to reduce the vacuum in thebrake booster.Then, using your hand, press down slowly onthe brake pedal until you feel a change inresistance. This is the brake pedal free-play.The free-play should be within the limits speci-fied in the illustration above. If it is not, have itinspected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G160A01HR

0.12 ~ 0.31 in.(3 ~ 8 mm)

CHECKING BRAKE PEDALCLEARANCE

G180A01A-AAT

You need a helper to check the brake pedalclearance. With the engine running, have yourhelper press down on the brake pedal severaltimes and then hold it down with a force of about110 lbs (50 kg, 490 N). The brake pedal clear-ance is the distance from the top surface of thebrake pedal to the asphalt sheeting under thefloor mat.If the brake pedal clearance is not within thelimits specified in the illustration, have it in-spected by your Hyundai dealer and adjustedor repaired if necessary.

G180A01L

2.95 in.(75 mm)

G190A02NF-GAT

CHECKING DRIVE BELTS

G140D01NF

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

G140D02NF

Power steering

COMP

Waterpump pully

Generator

Power steering

COMP

Water pump pully

Generator

Damper pulley

Damper pulley

Auto tensioner

Auto tensioner


25

Drive belts should be checked periodically forproper tension. At the same time, belts shouldbe examined for cracks, wear, fraying or otherevidence of deterioration and replaced if neces-sary.When a new belt is replaced, the belt should belocated within the pulley of flat idler.Belt routing should also be checked to be surethere is no interference between the belts andother parts of the engine.

NOTE:Drive belt tension is adjusted automaticallyby the auto tensioner.

CHECKING AND REPLACINGFUSES

G200A01A-AAT

Replacing a Fusible Link

A fusible link will melt if the electrical circuits fromthe battery are ever overloaded, thus prevent-ing damage to the entire wiring harness. (Thiscould be caused by a short in the systemdrawing too much current.) If this ever happens,have a Hyundai dealer determine the cause,repair the system and replace the fusible link.The fusible links are located in a relay box in theengine compartment for easy inspection.

HNF4004

! CAUTION:When replacing a fusible link, never useanything but a new fusible link with thesame or lower amperage rating. Never usea piece of wire or a higher-rated fusible link.This could result in serious damage andcreate a fire hazard.


26

2. Open the fuse box and examine each fuse.Remove each fuse by pulling it toward you(a small "fuse puller" tool is contained in therelay and fuse box of the engine room tosimplify this operation).

3. Be sure to check all other fuses even if you

G200B02NF

find one that appears to have burned out.4. Replace the blown fuse by pressing a new

fuse of the same rating into place. The fuseshould be a snug fit. If it is not, have the fuseclip repaired or replaced by a Hyundai dealer.If you do not have a spare fuse, you may beable to borrow a fuse of the same or lowerrating from an accessory you can tempo-rarily get along without (the radio or cigarettelighter, for example). Always remember toreplace the borrowed fuse.

!

G200B02L

Good Burned out

CAUTION:A burned-out fuse indicates that there is aproblem in the electrical circuit. If you re-place a fuse and it blows as soon as theaccessory is turned on, the problem isserious and should be referred to a Hyundaidealer for diagnosis and repair. Never re-place a fuse with anything except a fusewith the same or a lower amperage rating.A higher capacity fuse could cause damageand create a fire hazard.

NOTE:See page 6-39 for the fuse panel descrip-tions.

G200B01NF-GAT

Replacing Accessory Fuse

G200B01NF-A

The fuse box for the lights and other electricalaccessories will be found on the left side of theinstrument panel. Inside the box you will find alist showing the circuits protected by each fuse.If any of your car's lights or other electricalaccessories stop working, a blown fuse couldbe the reason. If the fuse has burned out, youwill see that the metal strip inside the fuse hasburned through. If you suspect a blown fuse,follow this procedure:1. Turn off the ignition and all other switches.


27CHECKING THE BATTERY

!

G210A01A-AAT

WARNING:Batteries can be dangerous! When workingwith batteries, carefully observe the follow-ing precautions to avoid serious injuries.

The fluid in the battery contains a strong solutionof sulfuric acid, which is poisonous and highlycorrosive. Be careful not to spill it on yourself orthe car. If you do spill battery fluid on yourself,immediately do the following:

HNF5017

o If battery fluid is on your skin, flush theaffected areas with water for at least 15minutes and then seek medical assistance.

o If battery fluid is in your eyes, rinse out youreyes with water and get medical assistanceas soon as possible. While you are beingdriven to get medical assistance, continue torinse your eyes by using a sponge or softcloth saturated with water.

o If you swallow battery fluid, drink a largequantity of water or milk followed by milk ofmagnesia, eat a raw egg or drink vegetableoil. Get medical assistance as soon aspossible.

While batteries are being charged (either by abattery charger or by the vehicle's generator),they produce explosive gases. Always ob-serve these warnings to prevent injuries fromoccurring:

o Charge batteries only in a well ventilatedarea.

o Do not permit flames, sparks or smoking inthe area.

o Keep children away from the area.

!

G210B04A-AAT

Checking the Battery

Keep the battery clean. Any evidence of corro-sion around the battery posts or terminalsshould be removed using a solution of house-hold baking soda and warm water. After thebattery terminals are dry, cover them with a lightcoating of grease.

PROPOSITION 65 WARNING:Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-sories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the state of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm.Batteries also contain other chemicalsknown to the state of California to causecancer. Wash hands after handling.


28

!! WARNING:Always read the following in-structions carefully when han-dling a battery.

Keep lighted cigarettes and allother flames or sparks away fromthe battery.

Hydrogen, which is a highly com-bustible gas, is always present inbattery cells and may explode ifignited.

Keep batteries out of the reach ofchildren because batteries con-tain highly corrosive SULFURICACID. Do not allow battery acidto contact your skin, eyes, cloth-ing or paint finish.

If any electrolyte gets into youreyes, flush your eyes with cleanwater for at least 15 minutes andget immediate medical attention.If possible, continue to applywater with a sponge or cloth untilmedical attention is received.

If electrolyte gets on your skin,thoroughly wash the contactedarea.If you feel a pain or a burningsensation, get medical attentionimmediately.

Wear eye protection when charg-ing or working near a battery.Always provide ventilation whenworking in an enclosed space.

o When lifting a plastic-cased battery, ex-cessive pressure on the case may causebattery acid to leak, resulting in personalinjury. Lift with a battery carrier or withyour hands on opposite corners.

o Never attempt to charge the battery whenthe battery cables are connected.

o The electrical ignition system works withhigh voltage.Never touch these components with theengine running or the ignition switchedon.

WARNING:

CHECKING ELECTRIC COOLINGFANS

!G220A01A-AAT

WARNING:The cooling fan is controlled by enginecoolant temperature and may sometimesoperate even when the engine is not run-ning. Use extreme caution when workingnear the blades of the cooling fan, so thatyou are not injured by a rotating fan blade.As the engine coolant temperature de-creases the fan will automatically shut off.This is a normal condition.

G220B01NF-GAT

Checking Engine Cooling Fan

The engine cooling fan should come on auto-matically if the engine coolant temperature ishigh or whenever the air conditioning is inoperation.


29FOR MORE INFORMATION ABOUTYOUR HYUNDAI

G240A01A-AAT

POWER STEERING HOSES

It is suggested that you check the power steer-ing hose connections for fluid leakage at thoseintervals specified in the vehicle maintenanceschedule in Section 5.The power steering hoses should be replacedif there is severe surface cracking, pulling,scuffing or worn spots. Deterioration of the hosecould cause premature failure.

POWER STEERING FLUID LEVEL

G230A03A-AAT to make certain that the power steering fluidlevel is between the "MAX" and "MIN" levelmarkings on the fluid reservoir.

NOTE:Grinding noise from the power steeringpump may be heard immediately after theengine is started in extremely cold condi-tions (below - 4°F). If the noise stops duringwarm up, there is no abnormal function inthe system. It is due to a power steeringfluid characteristic in extremely cold condi-tions.

Recommended FluidUse PSF-3 type fluid

NOTE:Do not start the engine when the powersteering oil reservoir is empty.

G230A01NF

G230A02NF

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

G250A01A-AAT

If you desire additional information about main-taining and servicing your Hyundai, you maypurchase a factory Shop Manual at your Hyundaidealer's parts department. This is the samemanual used by dealership technicians andwhile it is highly technical it can be useful inobtaining a better understanding of your car andhow it works.

The power steering fluid level should be checkedregularly. To check the power steering fluidlevel, be sure the engine is "OFF", then check


30 HEADLIGHT AIMING ADJUSTMENT

G290A02O-AAT

Before performing aiming adjustment, makesure of the following.1. Keep all tires inflated to the correct pressure.2. Place the vehicle on level ground and press

the front bumper & rear bumper down sev-eral times.Place vehicle at a distance of 118 in. (3m)from the test wall.

3. See that the vehicle is unloaded (except forfull levels of coolant, engine oil and fuel, andspare tire, jack, and tools). Have the driveror equivalent weight placed in driver's seat.

4. Clean the headlight lenses and turn on theheadlights (Low beam).

5. Open the hood.

G290A01NF-A

Verticalaiming

!

6. Draw a vertical line (through the center ofeach headlight beam pattern) and a horizon-tal line (through the center of each headlightbeam pattern) on the aiming screen.And then, draw a parallel line at 0.8 in. (21mm) under the horizontal line.

7. Adjust each cut-off line of the low beam to theparallel line with a phillips screwdriver -VERTICAL AIMING.

WARNING:Horizontal aiming should be adjusted byan authorized Hyundai dealer.

G290B01NF-AAT

Adjustment After Headlight AssemblyReplacement

G260B01GK

L

W

H

H

Cut-off line

Ground line

"P"

Horizontal line

Vertical line0.8 in.(21 mm)

If the vehicle has had front body repair and theheadlight assembly has been replaced, theheadlight aiming should be checked using theaiming screen as shown in the illustration. Turnon the headlight switch (Low Beam Position).1. Adjust headlights so that main axis of light is

parallel to the center line of the body and isaligned with point "P" shown in the illustration.

2. Dotted lines in the illustration show the centerof the headlights.


31

SPECIFICATION:

"H"Horizontal center line of headlights from ground: 26.73 in. (679mm)

"W"Distance between each headlight center :51.41 in. (1,306mm)

"L"Distance between the headlights and the wallthat the lights are tested against : 118.11 in.(3,000 mm)

REPLACEMENT OF LIGHT BULBS

G260A01L-GAT

Before attempting to replace a light bulb, be surethe switch is turned to the "OFF" position.The next paragraph shows how to reach thelight bulbs so they may be changed. Be sure toreplace the burned-out bulb with one of thesame number and wattage rating.See page 6-38 for the wattage descriptions.

! CAUTION:o Keep the lights out of contact with pe-

troleum products, such as oil, gasoline,etc.

o Be sure to replace the LED type equippedbulbs with an assembly.

Replacement instructions:

1. Allow the bulb to cool. Wear eye protection.2. Open the engine hood.3. Always grasp the bulb by its plastic base,

avoid touching the glass.

G270A01NF-AAT

HEADLIGHT, FRONT TURN SIGNALLIGHT AND FRONT FOG LIGHT

Headlight and Front Turn Signal Light

Headlight(High beam)

Headlight(Low beam)

Turn signal light(Front position light)

G260A01NF-A

Front Fog Light


32

HNF5027

9. Remove the protective cap from the re-placement bulb and install the new bulb bymatching the plastic base with the headlighthole. Reattach the bulb spring and recon-nect the connector.

10. Use the protective cap and carton topromptly dispose of the old bulb.

11. Check for proper headlight aim.

HNF5023

4. Using a socket wrench of the correct size,remove the headlight assembly mountingbolts.

HNF5024

5. Disconnect the power cord from the back ofthe headlight.

HNF5025

6. Turn the plastic cover counterclockwiseand remove it.

HNF5026

7. Disconnect the connector from the bulb base inthe back of the headlight.

8. Push the bulb spring to remove the headlightbulb.


33

12. To replace the front turn signal light bulb(front position light), remove it from the bulbholder and install the new bulb.

! WARNING:This halogen bulb contains gas under pres-sure and if impacted could shatter, result-ing in flying fragments. Always wear eyeprotection when servicing the bulb. Protectthe bulb against abrasions or scratchesand against liquids when lighted. Turn thebulb on only when installing in a headlight.Replace the headlight if damaged or cracked.Keep the bulb out of the reach of childrenand dispose of the used bulb with care.

HNF5028

G270A03O

Front Fog Light

NOTE:It is recommended that the front fog lightbulb should be replaced by an authorizedHyundai dealer.

G270D01NF-AAT

REAR COMBINATION LIGHT

Stop/Tail Light, Rear Turn Signal Light,Back-up Light and Rear Side MarkerLight

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the cover on the inside of the rearluggage trim by turning the knob counter-clockwise.

HNF5029


34

3. To replace the rear combination light (stop/tail light, rear side marker light and rear turnsignal light), remove it from the bulb holderand install the new bulb.

(1) Stop/tail light(2) Rear side marker light(3) Rear turn signal light

HNF5030-A HNF5042

4. Loosen the mounting screws of the trunk lidtrim with a phillips screwdriver and removethe trunk lid trim.

5. To replace the rear combination light (back-up light and stop/tail light), remove the socketby turning it counterclockwise.

6. Install the new bulb.

G270C01L-AAT

LUGGAGE COMPARTMENTLIGHT

1. Open the trunk lid.

2. Remove the luggage compartment light coveron the rear package tray panel with a flat-head screwdriver.

HNF5031


35

HNF5032

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HTB284

4. Replace with a new bulb.

G270G01L-AAT

INTERIOR LIGHT

HNF5034

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-headscrewdriver.

HNF5035

Screwdriver



36

G270K01L-AAT

GLOVE BOX ILLUMINATED LIGHT

1. Open the glove box.

2. Remove the glove box illuminated light coverwith a flat-head screwdriver.

HNF5036

Screwdriver

G270G01NF

G270G02NF

G270L01L-AAT

MAP LIGHT

1. Remove the plastic cover with a flat-headscrewdriver.



37

3. Disconnect the power cord.

HJM5039

HTB284



38

Socket Type

BAY 15d

w2.1 x 9.5d

BAY 15d

sv6-7, 6

BAY 15d

BAY15s

w2.1 x 9.5d

w2.1 x 9.5d

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Socket Type

P x 26d

P14,5s

BAY15d

w2.1 x 9.5d

sv6-7,6

PGJ13

BAY15d

w2.1 x 4.6d

BULB WATTAGES

G280A01NF-AAT

G280A01NF-A

Part Name

Stop / Tail Light

High Mounted Rear Stop Light

Tail Light

Luggage Compartment Light

Rear Side Marker Light

Rear Turn Signal Light

Back-up Light

License Plate Light

Part Name

Headlight

Front Turn Signal Light/Front Position Light

Map Light

Interior Light

Front Fog Light

Front Side Marker Light

Front Door Edge Warning Light

No.

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

Wattage

55

55

28/8

10

10

27

8

8

Low beam

High beam

Wattage

28/8

16

28/8

5

5

27

16

5


39FUSE PANEL DESCRIPTION

G200C01NF-AAT

Engine Compartment

NOTE:Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect thefuse box on your vehicle, refer to the fuse box label.

HNF4005


40

123456789101112131415161718192021222324

HORNTAILECUIG1DRL

FR FOGA/CON

F/PUMPDIODE

ATMSTOP

H/LP LO RHS/ROOF

H/LP WASHERH/LP HI

ECUSNSR.3SNSR.1SNSR.2

B/UPIGN COILECU (IG1)H/LP LO

ABS

PROTECTED COMPONENTSABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connectorABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connectorFuse 23, 24, 30, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35Defogger relayBlower relayPower window relay, Fuse 16Start relay, Ignition switch (IG2, START)Engine control unit relayPower connector 1/2, Fuse 21,22Ignition switch (ACC, IG1)Fusible Iink (ABS. 1, ABS. 2, RR HTD, BLOWER)(Spare)Horn relayTail light relayPCM(Spare)Siren relay, DRL control moduleFront fog light relayA/C relayFuel pump relay(Spare)ATM control relayStop light relay(Spare)Sunroof control moduleHeadlight washer motorHeadlight relay (High)(Spare)Oxygen sensor, Fuel pump relayMass air flow sensor, Crankshaft/Camshaft position sensor, Oil control valve, SMATRAA/C relay, Cooling fan relay, InjectorsBack up light switch, Pulse generator, Vehicle speed sensorIgnition coils, CondenserPCMHeadlight relay (Low)ABS/ESC control module, Multipurpose check connector

ABS.1ABS.2

I/P B+1RR HTDBLOWERP/WDWIGN.2

ECU RLYI/P B+2IGN.1ALT

MDPS

FUSE RATING40A20A40A40A40A40A40A30A30A30A150A100A15A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A

-20A15A15A15A20A20A10A10A15A15A10A20A10A20A10A

DESCRIPTION

FUSIBLELINK

FUSE


41

G200E01NF-AAT

Inner Panel

HNF4003


42

PROTECTED COMPONENTS(Spare)Seat warmer switchBCM(Body Control Module), Sunroof control module, Electronic chrome mirrorESC module, High blower relay, Humidity sensorCigarette lighter(Spare)Illumination lights, Right : License light, Rear combination light, Headlight, Glove box lightFront fog light relay, Left : License light, Rear combination light, HeadlightHeadlight washer relay, Right headlight leveling actuatorDRL control module, Headlight relay, AQS and ambient sensor, Left headlight leveling actuatorWiper and washerA/C control moduleSRS control module, Passenger's Airbag switchFront accessory socket, Rear power outletDigital clock, Audio, A/T shift lock control module, Power outside mirror and mirror foldingSafety window module(Spare)A/T shift lock control modulePower window main switch, Left rear power window switchPower window main switch, Right power window switch

FUSE RATING15A15A10A10A25A10A10A10A10A10A25A10A15A20A10A25A15A10A20A30A

FUSE1234567891011121314151617181920


43

PROTECTED COMPONENTSAudio ampDoor lock/unlock relayHazard switch, Hazard relayPower seat manual switch(RHD)Instrument clusterHazard switchBCM(Body Control Module), Instrument cluster, Yaw rate sensor, ESC switch(Spare)Burglar alarm relay(Spare)Rear fog light relayTrunk lid relay, Fuel filler door and trunk lid switch(Spare)Power seat manual switchSport mode switch, Key solenoidA/C control module, Outside mirror and mirror folding motorAudioBCM(Body Control Module), Digital clock, Instrument cluster, A/C control module, Courtesy lights

FUSE RATING20A20A10A30A10A10A10A15A10A15A15A15A15A30A10A10A15A15A

FUSE21222324252627282930313233343536

POWER CONNECTOR. 1POWER CONNECTOR. 2

7Emission Control System ............................................. 7-2Catalytic Converter ....................................................... 7-3

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

7

7 EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

2 EMISSION CONTROLSYSTEMS

H010B01A-AAT

1. Crankcase Emission Control System

The positive crankcase ventilation system isemployed to prevent air pollution caused byblow-by gases being emitted from the crank-case. This system supplies fresh filtered air tothe crankcase through the air intake hose.Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mixes withblow-by gases, which then pass through thePCV valve into the induction system.

Canister

Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank areabsorbed and stored in the onboard canister.When the engine is running, the fuel vaporsabsorbed in the canister are drawn into thesurge tank through the purge control solenoidvalve.

Purge Control Solenoid Valve (PCSV)

The purge control solenoid valve is controlledby the Engine Control Module (ECM); when theengine coolant temperature is low during idling,the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is nottaken into the engine. After the engine warms-up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens tointroduce evaporated fuel to the engine.

H010D01A-AAT

3. Exhaust Emission ControlSystem

The Exhaust Emission Control System is ahighly effective system which controls exhaustemissions while maintaining good vehicle per-formance.

H010A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is equipped with an emissioncontrol system to meet all emission regulations.There are three emission control systems whichare as follows.

(1) Crankcase emission control system(2) Evaporative emission control system(3) Exhaust emission control system

In order to assure the proper function of theemission control systems, it is recommendedthat you have your car inspected and main-tained by an authorized Hyundai dealer in ac-cordance with the maintenance schedule in thismanual.

Caution for the Inspection and MaintenanceTest (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC)system)

o To prevent the vehicle from misfiringduring dynamometer testing, turn theElectronic Stability Control (ESC) sys-tem off by pressing the ESC switch.

o After dynamometer testing is completed,turn the ESC system back on by pressingthe ESC switch again.

H010C01S-AAT

2. Evaporative Emission Control (Includ-ing ORVR: Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery) System

The Evaporative Emission Control System isdesigned to prevent fuel vapors from escapinginto the atmosphere.(The ORVR system is designed to allow thevapors from the fuel tank to be loaded into acanister while refueling at the gas station, pre-venting the escape of fuel vapors into theatmosphere.)

7EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

3

!!

CATALYTIC CONVERTER

H020A01A-AAT

All Hyundai vehicles are equipped with a mono-lith type three-way catalytic converter to re-duce the carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons andnitrogen oxides contained in the exhaust gas.Exhaust gases passing through the catalyticconverter cause it to operate at a very hightemperature. The introduction of large amountsof unburned gasoline into the exhaust maycause the catalytic converter to overheat andcreate a fire hazard. This risk may be reducedby observing the following:

Catalytic Converter

WARNING:o Use unleaded fuel only.o Maintain the engine in good operating

condition. Extremely high catalytic con-verter temperatures can result from im-proper operation of the electrical, igni-tion or multiport electronic fuel injec-tion.

o If your engine stalls, pings, knocks, or ishard to start, have your Hyundai dealerinspect and repair the problem as soonas possible.

o Avoid driving with a very low fuel level.Running out of gasoline may cause theengine to misfire and result in damage tothe catalytic converter.

o Avoid idling the engine for periodslonger than 10 minutes.

o The vehicle should not be pushed orpulled to get started. This may cause thecatalytic converter to overheat and cre-ate a fire hazard.

o Do not touch the catalytic converter orany other part of the exhaust systemwhile the catalytic converter is hot. Shutoff the engine, wait for at least one hourbefore touching the catalytic converteror any other part of the exhaust system.

H020A01NF

o Remember that your Hyundai dealer isyour best source of assistance.

o Do not stop your Hyundai over any com-bustible material such as grass, paper,leaves or rags. These materials mightcontact the hot catalytic converter and afire might result.

WARNING:

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) .............................. 8-2Engine Number ............................................................. 8-2Tire Information ............................................................. 8-2Recommended Inflation Pressures ............................... 8-3Checking Tire Inflation Pressure ................................... 8-4Tire Sidewall Labeling ................................................... 8-4Tire Terminology and Definitions ................................... 8-6All Season Tires ............................................................ 8-8Summer Tires ............................................................... 8-8Snow Tires .................................................................... 8-8Tire Chains.................................................................... 8-8Tire Rotation.................................................................. 8-9Tire Balancing ............................................................... 8-9Tire Traction ................................................................ 8-10When to Replace Tires ............................................... 8-10Tire Maintenance ........................................................ 8-11Spare Tire and Tools ................................................... 8-11Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle .......................... 8-12Consumer Information ................................................. 8-12Reporting Safety Defects ............................................ 8-14Binding Arbitration of Warranty Claims ....................... 8-15

88

CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTINGSAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING

ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

8 CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

2 ENGINE NUMBERVEHICLE IDENTIFICATIONNUMBER (VIN)

I010B01A-AATI010A01O-AAT

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is thenumber used in registering your car and in alllegal matters pertaining to its ownership, etc. Itcan be found in three different places on yourcar:

1. On the bulkhead between the engine andpassenger compartments.

2. On the left top side of the instrument panelwhere it can be seen by looking down throughthe windshield.

3. On the lower side of the center pillar outerpanel.

The engine number is stamped on the engineblock as shown in the drawing.

TIRES

I020A02A-AAT

TIRE INFORMATION

The tires supplied on your new Hyundaiare chosen to provide the best perfor-mance for normal driving.If you ever have questions about yourtire warranty and where to obtain ser-vice, see the tire manufacturer's book-let included with your vehicle's Owner'sManual Literature Kit.

I010A01NF-A HNF6003

(2.4L)

(3.3L)

I010B01NF

8CONSUMER INFORMATION, REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS & BINDING ARBITRATION OF WARRANTY CLAIMS

3

I030A01NF-AAT

RECOMMENDED INFLATION PRES-SURES

Tire label located on the driver's side ofthe center pillar outer panel gives thecold tire pressures recommended foryour vehicle with the original tire size,the number of people that can be in yourvehicle and vehicle capacity weight.

These pressures were chosen to pro-vide the most satisfactory combinationof ride comfort, tire wear and stabilityunder normal conditions. Tire pressuresshould be checked at least monthly.Proper tire inflation pressures shouldbe maintained for these reasons:

!

CAUTION:Always observe the following:

o Check pressures when the tiresare cold. (After the vehicle hasbeen parked for at least three hoursor hasn't been driven more than 1mile (1.6 km) since starting up.)

!

WARNING:o Lower-than-recommended tire

pressures cause uneven treadwear, poor handling, poor fueleconomy or tire failure.

o Higher-than-recommended tirepressures can cause poor han-dling, uneven tread wear or tirefailure.

I030A01NF-A

I030A03NF-A

I030A04NF-A


4

Check the tire's inflation pressure whenthe tires are cold. - "Cold" means yourvehicle has been sitting for at leastthree hours or driven no more than 1mile (1.6 km).Remove the valve cap from the tirevalve stem. Press the tire gauge firmlyonto the valve to get a pressure mea-surement. If the cold tire inflation pres-sure matches the recommended pres-sure on the tire and loading informationlabel, no further adjustment is neces-sary. If the pressure is low, add air untilyou reach the recommended amount.If you overfill the tire, release air bypushing on the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve. Recheck the tire pres-sure with the tire gauge. Be sure to putthe valve caps back on the valve stems.They help prevent leaks by keeping outdirt and moisture.

o Check the pressure of your sparetire each time you check the pres-sure of other tires.

o Worn, old tires can cause acci-dents. If your tread is badly worn,or if your tires have been dam-aged, replace them.

I035A01JM-AAT

CHECKING TIRE INFLATION PRES-SURE

Check your tires once a month or more.Also, check the tire pressure of thespare tire.

How to Check

Use a good quality gauge to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tiresare properly inflated simply by lookingat them. Radial tires may look properlyinflated even when they're underinflated.

Federal law requires tire manufacturersto place standardized information onthe sidewall of all tires. This informationidentifies and describes the fundamen-tal characteristics of the tire and alsoprovides the tire identification number(TIN) for safety standard certification.The TIN can be used to identify the tirein case of a recall.

I030B01NF-AAT

TIRE SIDEWALL LABELING

I030B04JM

1

23

4

5, 6

7

1


5

1. Manufacturer or Brand nameo Manufacturer or Brand name is

shown.2. Tire size

(example: P215/60R16 94V)o The "P" indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles.o Three-digit number (215): This num-

ber gives the width in millimetersof the tire from sidewall edge tosidewall edge.

o Two-digit number (60): This num-ber, known as the aspect ratio,gives the tire's ratio of height towidth.

o R: The "R" stands for radial.o Two-digit number (16): This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter ininches.

o Two digit number (94): This num-ber is the tire's load index. It is ameasurement of how much weighteach tire can support.

o V: Speed Rating. The speed ratingdenotes the speed at which a tire isdesigned to be driven for extendedperiods of time. The ratings rangefrom "A" to "Z" (98 to 186 MPH).

3. TIN (Tire Identification Number) fornew tire (example: DOT XX XX XXXXXXX)o DOT: Abbreviation for the "Depart-

ment of Transportation". The sym-bol can be placed above, below orto the left or right of the Tire Iden-tification Number. It indicates thetire is in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation Mo-tor Vehicle Safety Standards.

o 1st two-digit code: Manufacturer'sidentification mark

o 2nd two-digit code: Tire sizeo 3rd three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional)o 4th four-digit code: Date of Manu-

facture

o Four numbers represent the weekand year the tire was built. Forexample, the numbers 3105 meansthe 31st week of 2005.

4. Tire ply composition and materialThe number of layers or plies ofrubbercoated fabric in the tire. Tiremanufacturers also must indicatethe materials in the tire, which in-clude steel, nylon, polyester, andothers. The letter "R" means radialply construction; the letter "D" meansdiagonal or bias ply construction;and the letter "B" means belted-biasply construction.

5. Maximum permissible inflationpressureThis number is the greatest amountof air pressure that should be put inthe tire. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible inflation pressure. Referto the Tire and Loading Informationlabel for recommended inflation pres-sure.


6

6. Maximum load ratingThis number indicates the maximumload in kilograms and pounds thatcan be carried by the tire. Whenreplacing the tires on the vehicle,always use a tire that has the sameload rating as the factory installedtire.

7. Uniform Tire Quality Grading(UTQG):Tire manufacturers are required tograde tires based on three perfor-mance factors: treadwear, tractionand temperature resistance. For moreinformation, see Uniform Tire Qual-ity Grading on page 8-13.

I030D01JM-AAT

TIRE TERMINOLOGY AND DEFINI-TIONS

Air Pressure: The amount of air insidethe tire pressing outward on the tire. Airpressure is expressed in pounds persquare inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).Accessory Weight: This means thecombined weight of optional accesso-ries. Some examples of optional ac-cessories are, automatic transmission,power seats, and air conditioning.Aspect Ratio: The relationship of atire's height to its width.Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords thatis located between the plies and thetread. Cords may be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.Bead: The tire bead contains steelwires wrapped by steel cords that holdthe tire onto the rim.Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in whichthe plies are laid at alternate anglesless than 90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of airpressure in a tire, measured in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascals(kPa) before a tire has built up heat fromdriving.Curb Weight: This means the weight ofa motor vehicle with standard and op-tional equipment including the maxi-mum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant,but without passengers and cargo.DOT Markings: A code molded into thesidewall of a tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S. Depart-ment of Transportation motor vehiclesafety standards. The DOT code in-cludes the Tire Identification Number(TIN), an alphanumeric designator whichcan also identify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand and date ofproduction.GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight RatingGAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the front Axle.GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Ratingfor the rear axle.


7

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The sideof an asymmetrical tire, that must al-ways face outward when mounted on avehicle.Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit forair pressure.Load Index: An assigned number rang-ing from 1 to 279 that corresponds tothe load carrying capacity of a tire.Maximum Inflation Pressure: Themaximum air pressure to which a coldtire may be inflated. The maximum airpressure is molded onto the sidewall.Maximum Load Rating: The load rat-ing for a tire at the maximum permis-sible inflation pressure for that tire.Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:The sum of curb weight; accessoryweight; vehicle capacity weight; andproduction options weight.Normal Occupant Weight: The num-ber of occupants a vehicle is designedto seat multiplied by 150 pounds (68kg).

Occupant Distribution: Designatedseating positions.Outward Facing Sidewall: The side ofan asymmetrical tire that has a particu-lar side that faces outward whenmounted on a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering or bears manufacturer,brand and or model name molding thatis higher or deeper than the same mold-ings on the other sidewall of the tire.Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire usedon passenger cars and some light dutytrucks and multipurpose vehicles.Recommended Inflation Pressure:Vehicle manufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure as shown on thetire placard.Radial Ply tire: A pneumatic tire inwhich the ply cords that extend to thebeads are laid at 90 degrees to thecenterline of the tread.Rim: A metal support for a tire uponwhich the tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire betweenthe tread and the bead.Speed Rating: An alphanumeric codeassigned to a tire indicating the maxi-mum speed at which a tire can operate.Traction: The friction between the tireand the road surface. The amount ofgrip provided.Tread: The portion of a tire that comesinto contact with the road.Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands,sometimes called "wear bars," that showacross the tread of a tire when only 2/32inch of tread remains.UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards, a tire information systemthat provides consumers with ratingsfor a tire's traction, temperature andtreadwear. Ratings are determined bytire manufacturers using governmenttesting procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire.


8

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The numberof designated seating positions multi-plied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the ratedcargo and luggage load.Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire:Load on an individual tire due to curband accessory weight plus maximumoccupant and cargo weight.Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:That load on an individual tire that isdetermined by distributing to each axleits share of the curb weight, accessoryweight, and normal occupant weightand dividing by 2.Vehicle Placard: A label permanentlyattached to a vehicle showing the origi-nal equipment tire size and recom-mended inflation pressure.

all four wheels; otherwise, poor han-dling may result.Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28 kPa)more air pressure than the pressurerecommended for the standard tires onthe tire label on the driver's side of thecenter pillar , or up to the maximumpressure shown on the tire sidewall,whichever is less.Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120km/h) when your car is equipped withsnow tires.

I040B01JM-AAT

ALL SEASON TIRES

Hyundai specifies all season tires onsome models to provide good perfor-mance for use all year round, includingsnowy and icy road conditions. All sea-

I040C01JM-AAT

SUMMER TIRES

Hyundai specifies summer tires on somemodels to provide superior performanceon dry roads. Summer tire performanceis substantially reduced in snow andice. Summer tires do not have the tiretraction rating M+S (Mud and Snow) onthe tire side wall. If you plan to operateyour vehicle in snowy or icy conditions,Hyundai recommends the use of snowtires or all season tires on all four wheels.

I050A03Y-AAT

TIRE CHAINS

Tire chains, if necessary, should beinstalled on the front wheels. Be surethat the chains are the proper size andthat they are installed in accordancewith the manufacturer's instructions.To minimize tire and chain wear, do notcontinue to use tire chains when theyare no longer needed.

son tires are identified by ALL SEASONand/or M+S (Mud and Snow) on the tiresidewall. Snow tires have better snowtraction than all season tires an may bemore appropriate in some areas.

I040A01O-AAT

SNOW TIRES

If you equip your car with snow tires,they should be the same size and havethe same load capacity as the originaltires. Snow tires should be installed on


9

I070A01A-AAT

TIRE BALANCING

A tire that is out of balance may affecthandling and tire wear. The tires on yourHyundai were balanced before the carwas delivered but may need balancingagain during the years you own the car.Whenever a tire is dismounted for re-pair, it should be rebalanced beforebeing reinstalled on the car.

!I060A02A-AAT

TIRE ROTATION

Tires should be rotated every 7,500miles (12,000 km). If you notice thattires are wearing unevenly between ro-tations, have the car checked by aHyundai dealer so the cause may becorrected.After rotating, adjust the tire pressuresand be sure to check the wheel nuttorque.

WARNING:o Do not use the temporary spare

tire for tire rotation.o Do not mix bias ply and radial ply

tires under any circumstances.This may cause unusual handlingcharacteristics that could result indeath, serious injury, or propertydamage.

I060A02NF

! WARNING:o When driving on roads covered

with snow or ice, drive at less than20 mph (30 km/h).

o Use the SAE "S" class or wire &plastic chains.

o If you have noise caused by chainscontacting the body, retighten thechain to avoid contact with thevehicle body.

o To prevent body damage, retightenthe chains after driving 0.3~0.6miles.

o Don't use a tire chains to the ve-hicle which aluminium wheels areinstalled to keep the wheels. If it ison unavoidable circumstances,use a wire chains.

o Use wire chains less than 15mm toprevent damage to the chain's con-nection.


10

!WARNING:

o Driving on worn-out tires is dan-gerous! Worn-out tires can causeloss of braking effectiveness,steering control and traction. Whenreplacing tires, never mix radialand bias ply tires on the same car.If you replace radial tires with bias-ply tires, they must be installed insets of four.

o Using tires and wheels of otherthan the recommended sizes couldcause unusual handling charac-teristics that could cause death,serious injury, or property dam-age.

o Wheels that do not meet Hyundai'sdimensional specifications mayfit poorly and result in damage tothe vehicle, including brokenwheel studs.

HNF5015

I090A02A-AAT

WHEN TO REPLACE TIRES

The original tires on your car have treadwear indicators. The location of treadwear indicators is shown by the "TWI"or " " marks, etc. The tread wearindicators appear when the tread depthis 0.06 in. (1.6 mm). The tire should bereplaced when these appear as a solidbar across two or more grooves of thetread. Always replace your tires withthose of the recommended size. If youchange wheels, the new wheel's rimwidth and offset must meet Hyundaispecification.

Tread wearindicator

0.06 in. (1.6 mm)

I080A01A-AAT

TIRE TRACTION

Tire traction can be reduced if you driveon worn tires, tires that are improperlyinflated or on slippery road surfaces.Tires should be replaced when treadwear indicators appear. To reduce thepossibility of losing control, slow downwhenever there is rain, snow or ice onthe road.


11

I090B01JM-AAT

TIRE MAINTENANCE

In addition to proper inflation, correctwheel alignment helps to decrease tirewear. If you find a tire is worn unevenly,have your dealer check the wheel align-ment.

When you have new tires installed,make sure they are balanced. This willincrease vehicle ride comfort and tirelife. Additionally, a tire shoud always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel.

SPARE TIRE AND TOOLS

I100A01NF-AAT

Your Hyundai is delivered with the fol-lowing:

Spare tire and wheelWrench bar (1)Jack (2)Wheel nut wrench (3)Tool receptacle (4)

I100A01NF-A

I110A01A-AAT

SHOP MANUAL

A Hyundai Shop Manual is available from yourauthorized Hyundai dealer. It's written for pro-fessional technicians, but is simple enough formost mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.


12 CONSUMER INFORMATION

I130A01A-AAT

This consumer information has been preparedin accordance with regulations issued by theNational Highway Traffic Safety Administrationof the U.S. Department of Transportation. Itprovides the purchasers and/or prospectivepurchasers of Hyundai automobiles with infor-mation on uniform tire quality grading. YourHyundai dealer will help answer any questionsyou may have as you read this information.

WARRANTIES FOR YOUR HYUNDAIVEHICLE

I120A02A-AAT

o New vehicle 60 Months/60,000 Miles LimitedWarranty.

o New vehicle 120 Months/100,000 Miles Lim-ited Powertrain Warranty (Original owneronly).

o Anti-Perforation Limited Warrantyo Emission Defect Warranty - Federal Vehicleo California Emission Control System War-

ranty (if applicable)o Emission Performance Warranty Federal

vehicleo Replacement Parts and Accessories Lim-

ited Warranty

NOTE:Detailed warranty information is providedin your Hyundai Owner's Handbook.

I130B04A-AAT

Tire Quality Grading

Department of Transportation qualitygrades - All passenger vehicle tiresmust conform to Federal Safety Stan-dards in addition to these grades. Thesequality grades are molded on thesidewall.

Treadwear - The treadwear grade is acomparative rating based on the wearrate of the tire when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified gov-ernment test course. For example, atire graded 150 would wear one and ahalf (1 - 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance of tiresdepends upon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and may departsignificantly from the norm due to varia-tions in driving habits, service prac-tices and differences in road character-istics and climate.


13

Traction AA, A, B, C - The tractiongrades, from highest to lowest, are AA,A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pave-ment as measured under controlledconditions on specified government testsurfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor traction per-formance.

! WARNING:The traction grade assigned to thistire is based on straight-ahead brak-ing traction tests, and does not in-clude acceleration, cornering, hy-droplaning, or peak traction charac-teristics.

Temperature A, B, C - The tempera-ture grades are A (the highest), B, andC, representing the tire's resistance tothe generation of heat and its ability todissipate heat when tested under con-trolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperature canlead to sudden tire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performanceon the laboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

!WARNING:

The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properlyinflated and not overloaded. Exces-sive speed, underinflation, or exces-sive loading, either separately or incombination, can cause heat buildupand possible tire failure.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading - Qual-ity grades can be found on the tiresidewall between the tread shoulderand the maximum section width.For example :Treadwear 200 Traction AA Tempera-ture A


14 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

I130C01A-AAT

If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying HYUNDAI MOTOR AMERICA. IfNHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles,it may order a recall and remedy cam-paign. However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problems betweenyou, your dealer, or HYUNDAI MOTORAMERICA.To contact NHTSA, you may either call theAuto Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Departmentof Transportation, Washington. D.C. 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety from the Hotline.

I130D03A-AAT

Hyundai motor vehicles are designed and manu-factured to meet or exceed all applicable safetystandards.

For your safety, however, we strongly urge youto read and follow all directions in this Owner'sManual, particularly the information under theheadings "NOTE", "CAUTION" and "WARN-ING".

If, after reading this manual, you have anyquestions regarding the operation of your ve-hicle, please contact your nearest HyundaiMotor America Regional Office as listed below:

Eastern Region : Connecticut, Delaware,Maine, Maryland, Massachusetts, New Hamp-shire, New Jersey, New York, Pennsylvanina,Rhode Island, Vermont, Virginia, West Virginia.

Eastern Region1100 Cranbury South River RoadJamesburg, NJ 08831(800) 633-5151

Southern Region: Alabama, Arkansas, Florida,Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, North Caro-lina, South Carolina, Oklahoma, Tennessee,Texas.

Southern Region270 Riverside Parkway, Suite AAustell, GA 30168(800) 633-5151

Central Region: Illinois, Indiana, Missouri, lowa,Kansas, Kentucky, Michigan, Minnesota, Ne-braska, North Dakota, South Dakota, Ohio,Wisconsin.

Central Region1705 Sequoia DriveAurora, Illinois 60506(800) 633-5151

Western Region: Alaska, Hawaii, Arizona, Cali-fornia, Colorado, ldaho, Montana, Nevada, NewMexico, Oregon, Texas, Utah, Washington,Wyoming.

Western Region10550 Talbert AvenueP.O.Box 20850Fountain Valley, California 92728-0850(800) 633-5151


15

I140A01A-AAT

Any claim or dispute you may haverelated to your vehicle's warranty or theduties contemplated under the warranty,including claims related to the refund orpartial refund of your vehicle's purchaseprice (excluding personal injury or prod-uct liability claims), shall be resolvedby binding arbitration. Binding arbitra-tion shall be administered by and throughthe National Arbitration Forum (NAF) orthe American Arbitration Association(AAA), under the Code of Procedure ofthe entity you select.You will not be responsible for payingfiling and hearing fees above $275.00.All other arbitration costs shall be borneby Hyundai Motor America. You are notresponsible to pay any of the costsHyundai incurs.

This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallnot deprive you of any remedies avail-able to you under applicable law. Theparties are waiving their right to seekremedies in court, including the right toa jury trial.This Binding Arbitration Agreement shallbe governed by and interpreted underthe Federal Arbitration Act, 9 U.S.C.sections 1-16. Judgment upon any awardmay be entered in any court havingjurisdiction.You may revoke this Arbitration Agree-ment by (1) written notice or (2) elec-tronic notice. Written notice must bedelivered (via certified mail) to HyundaiMotor America, Attn: Consumer Af-fairs, 10550 Talbert Avenue, P.O. Box20849, Fountain Valley, CA 92728-0849.Electronic notice must be submitted atthe following website address: http://warranty-arbitration.hyundaiUSA.com.Notice must be received within 90 daysafter you purchase your vehicle.

BINDING ARBITRATION

9Measurement ................................................................ 9-2Engine ........................................................................... 9-3Lubrication Chart ........................................................... 9-4

VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

9

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

2

3.3L

130A (13.5V)

J010A02NF-AAT

MEASUREMENT

J060A01NF-AAT

FUEL SYSTEM

J020A01NF-AAT

POWER STEERING

J030A01NF-AAT

TIRE

Item

Battery

Alternator

J040A01NF-GAT

ELECTRICAL

2.4L

110A (13.5V)

in.(mm)

Fuel tank capacity 17.7us.gal (14.7 imp.gal, 67 liter)

ITEM

MF68AH

J050A01NF-AAT

BRAKE

Dual hydraulic with brake booster

Ventilated disc

Disc type

Cable operated on rear wheel

Type

Front brake type

Rear brake type

Parking brake

Type

Wheel free play

Rack stroke

Oil pump type

Rack and pinion

0 ~ 1.18 in. (0 ~ 30 mm)

5.90 in. (150 mm)

Vane type

2.4L/3.3L

189.9 (4800)

72.1 (1832)

58.0 (1475)

107.4 (2730)

61.6 (1565)

61.1 (1550)

Overall length

Overall width

Overall height

Wheel base

Wheel tread Front

Rear

Standard

Option

Spare

P215/60R16

P225/50R17

T125/80D16 (Temporary)

9VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

3

3.3L

6-Cyl., V-type DOHC

3.62 x 3.29 (92.0 x 83.8)

203.9 (3,342)

1 - 2 - 3 - 4 - 5 - 6

IFR5G-11

620 ± 100

BTDC 10° ± 5°

0.006 ~ 0.009 in. (0.17 ~ 0.23 mm)

0.01 ~ 0.012 in. (0.27 ~ 0.33 mm)

0.039 ~ 0.043 in. (1.0 - 1.1 mm)

2.4L

4-Cyl., In-line DOHC

3.46 x 3.81 (88 x 97)

143.9(2,359)

1 - 3 - 4 - 2

SK16PR-A11

650 ± 100

BTDC 8° ± 5°

ENGINE

J070A01NF-AAT

ITEMS

Engine Type

Bore x Stroke in.(mm)

Displacement cu.in.(cc)

Firing order

Valve clearance (cold engine) Intake

Exhaust

Spark plug

Spark plug gap

Idle speed (rpm)

Ignition timing (Base)

9 VEHICLE SPECIFICATIONS

4

Oil & Grease Standard

API SJ, SL

or ABOVE, SAE 5W-20, SAE 5W-30 (ALL TEMP. RANGE)

ILSAC GF-3 SAE 10W-30 (ABOVE 0°F(-18°C))

or ABOVE

HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4)

HYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SP III or other

brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai Motor Co..

Ethylene glycol base for aluminum radiator

PSF-3 TYPE FLUID

DOT 3 or DOT 4 Equivalent

LUBRICATION CHART

J080A02NF-AAT

Quantity (Us. qts)(Imp. qts, Liter)

Drain and refill (With oil filter);

2.4L : 4.54 (3.78, 4.3)

3.3L : 6.02 (5.02, 5.7)

2.0 (1.67, 1.9)

2.4L : 8.24 (6.86, 7.8)

3.3L : 11.52 (9.59, 10.9)

2.4L : 6.87 (5.72, 6.5)

2.4L : 6.66 (5.54, 6.3)

3.3L : 8.66 (7.21, 8.2)

0.95 (0.79, 0.9)

As required

Item

Engine Oil

Transaxle

Coolant

Power steering

Brake and clutch fluid

Manual Transaxle

Automatic Transaxle

Manual

Automatic

10

INDEX

10

10 INDEX

2

AAccessory Box ................................................................................ 1-75Advanced Supplemental Restraint (AIRBAG) System (SRS) ...... 1-36

Curtain airbag ............................................................................... 1-47Driver's and passenger's front airbag ....................................... 1-37Occupant classification system .................................................. 1-42Side impact airbag ....................................................................... 1-45

Air Cleaner Filter .............................................................................. 6-14Air Conditioning

Care .............................................................................................. 6-21Filter .................................................................................. 1-112, 6-22Operation .......................................................................... 1-103, 6-21Switch ......................................................................................... 1-103

Antenna .......................................................................................... 1-130Ashtray ............................................................................................. 1-68Audio System

Audio remote control switch ....................................................... 1-95Compact disc player operation (V480) .................................... 1-118Compact disc player operation (V490) .................................... 1-125Stereo radio operation (V480) .................................................. 1-115Stereo radio operation (V490) .................................................. 1-122

Automatic Heating and Cooling Control System ......................... 1-106Automatic-Dimming Mirror with Z-Nav™ Electronic Compass

Display and HomeLink® ........................................................................................................... 1-79

BBattery .............................................................................................. 6-27Binding Arbitration ............................................................................ 8-15Brake

Anti-lock brake system (ABS) .................................................... 2-12Checking the brakes ................................................................... 6-20Fluid .............................................................................................. 6-20Pedal clearance ........................................................................... 6-24Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-24Practices ...................................................................................... 2-14

Breaking-In your New Hyundai ........................................................ 1-3

CCare of Discs ................................................................................ 1-130Catalytic Converter ............................................................................ 7-3Center Console Compartment ........................................................ 1-76Child Restraint System ................................................................... 1-28

Installing a child restraint system with "Tether Anchorage" system ...................................................... 1-30Securing a child restraint system with "ISOFIX" system ......... 1-31

Child-Protector Rear Door Lock ...................................................... 1-6Cigarette Lighter .............................................................................. 1-67Clock ................................................................................................ 1-66Clutch

Pedal free-play ............................................................................. 6-23

10INDEX

3

Combination LightAuto Light ..................................................................................... 1-63Headlight flasher .......................................................................... 1-63Headlight switch ........................................................................... 1-62High-beam switch ........................................................................ 1-62Lane change signal ..................................................................... 1-62Parking light auto off .................................................................... 1-62Turn signal operation ................................................................... 1-61

Consumer Information ..................................................................... 8-12Cooling Fans .................................................................................... 6-28Corrosion protection

Cleaning the interior ....................................................................... 4-5Protecting your Hyundai from corrosion ...................................... 4-2Washing and waxing ..................................................................... 4-3

Cruise Control .................................................................................. 1-93

DDay/night Inside Rearview Mirror ................................................... 1-78Defrosting/Defogging ..................................................................... 1-105Door

Central door locks ......................................................................... 1-6Door locks ...................................................................................... 1-4Front door warning light .............................................................. 1-92Locking and unlocking front door with a key .............................. 1-5

Drink Holder ..................................................................................... 1-68Driving

Economical driving ....................................................................... 2-15Smooth cornering ......................................................................... 2-16Winter driving ............................................................................... 2-16

EElectronic Stability Control (ESC) System ..................................... 2-13Emission Control System .................................................................. 7-2Engine

Before starting the engine ............................................................. 2-3Compartment (2.4 DOHC) ............................................................ 6-2Compartment (3.3 V6) ................................................................... 6-3Coolant ............................................................................................ 6-8Coolant temperature gauge ........................................................ 1-56If the engine overheats ................................................................. 3-4Number ........................................................................................... 8-2Oil .................................................................................................... 6-5Starting ............................................................................................ 2-4

Engine Exhaust Can Be Dangerous! ............................................... 2-2

FFan Speed Control .............................................................. 1-97, 1-108Fog Light

Front ............................................................................................. 1-64Front Seats

Active headrests .......................................................................... 1-16Adjustable front seats .................................................................. 1-14Adjustable headrests ................................................................... 1-15Adjusting seat forward and rearward ............................... 1-14, 1-17Adjusting seatback angle .................................................. 1-14, 1-18Power driver's seat ..................................................................... 1-17Seat cushion height adjustment ....................................... 1-17, 1-18Seat warmer ................................................................................. 1-19

10 INDEX

4

FuelCapacity .......................................................................................... 9-2Gauge ........................................................................................... 1-55Recommendations ......................................................................... 1-2

Fuel Filler LidRemote release ............................................................................ 1-87

Fuse Panel Description ................................................................... 6-39Fuses ............................................................................................... 6-25

GGeneral Checks ................................................................................ 6-4Glove Box ........................................................................................ 1-74

HHazard Warning System ................................................................. 1-65Headlight

Aiming adjustment ........................................................................ 6-30Replacement ................................................................................ 6-31Switch ........................................................................................... 1-62

Heating and Cooling Control ........................................................... 1-96Heating and Ventilation

Air flow control ................................................................ 1-98, 1-110Air intake control switch ................................................ 1-101, 1-108Bi-level heating ........................................................................... 1-102Defrosting/Defogging ................................................................. 1-105Fan speed control (Blower Control) ............................... 1-97, 1-108Temperature control .................................................................... 1-97

High-Mounted Rear Stop Light ....................................................... 1-87Hood Release .................................................................................. 1-89Horn .................................................................................................. 1-92

IIgnition Switch .................................................................................... 2-3Instrument Cluster and Indicator Lights ......................................... 1-50Instrument Panel Light Control (Rheostat) .................................... 1-67Interior Light ..................................................................................... 1-73Intermittent Wiper ............................................................................. 1-65

JJump Starting ..................................................................................... 3-3

KKey...................................................................................................... 1-3

If you lose your keys .................................................................. 3-13Positions ......................................................................................... 2-3

LLight Bulb Watages .......................................................................... 6-38Light Bulbs Replacement ................................................................ 6-31Lubrication Chart ............................................................................... 9-4

10INDEX

5

MMaintenance Intervals

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items .............................. 5-7Maintenance under severe usage conditions .............................. 5-6Scheduled maintenance ................................................................ 5-4Service requirements .................................................................... 5-2

MirrorsDay/night inside rearview ............................................................ 1-78Homelink mirror ............................................................................ 1-79Outside rearview .......................................................................... 1-77Outside rearview mirror heater .................................................. 1-78

Multi Box ........................................................................................... 1-75

OOdometer ......................................................................................... 1-57Outside Rearview Mirror ................................................................. 1-77

PParking Brake .................................................................................. 1-85Power Adjustable Pedals ................................................................ 2-11Power Outlets .................................................................................. 1-67Power Steering Fluid Level ............................................................. 6-29

RRear Seat

Armrest ......................................................................................... 1-92Folding rear seatbacks ............................................................... 1-19Rear seatback safety lock .......................................................... 1-20Warning ......................................................................................... 1-20

Rear Window Defroster Switch ...................................................... 1-66Reporting Safety Defects ................................................................ 8-14

SSeat

Front ............................................................................................. 1-14Rear .............................................................................................. 1-19

Seat Belts3-Point system ............................................................................. 1-24Adjusting your seat belt ............................................................... 1-25Care of seat belts ........................................................................ 1-22Pre-tensioner seat belt ................................................................ 1-33Precautions .................................................................................. 1-21Rear seat center 3-point system with combination locking retractor ........................................................................ 1-26

Seatback Pocket ............................................................................. 1-70Shopping Bag Holder ....................................................................... 1-69Spark Plugs ...................................................................................... 6-11Spectacle Case ............................................................................... 1-74Speedometer .................................................................................... 1-57Starting Procedure ............................................................................. 2-5

10 INDEX

6

Steering WheelFree-play ...................................................................................... 6-23Tilt and telescopic type ............................................................... 1-91Tilt type ......................................................................................... 1-91

Stereo Sound System ................................................................... 1-113Sun Visor .......................................................................................... 1-90Sunroof ............................................................................................. 1-70

TTachometer ...................................................................................... 1-56Theft-Alarm System ........................................................................... 1-8Tires

All season tires .............................................................................. 8-8Balancing ........................................................................................ 8-9Chains ............................................................................................. 8-8Changing a flat tire ........................................................................ 3-6Checking the inflation pressure .................................................... 8-4If you have a flat tire ..................................................................... 3-6Information ...................................................................................... 8-2Maintenance ................................................................................. 8-11Pressure ......................................................................................... 8-3Replacement ................................................................................ 8-10Rotation ........................................................................................... 8-9Sidewall labeling ............................................................................. 8-4Snow tires ...................................................................................... 8-8Spare tire ........................................................................................ 3-5Summer tires .................................................................................. 8-8Terminology and definitions .......................................................... 8-6Traction ......................................................................................... 8-10

TowingA trailer (or vehicle) ..................................................................... 2-19Emergency ................................................................................... 3-13If your vehicle must be towed .................................................... 3-11

TransaxleAutomatic ........................................................................................ 2-8Automatic transaxle fluid checking ............................................. 6-18Manual ............................................................................................ 2-5Manual transaxle oil checking .................................................... 6-17

Trip Computer .................................................................................. 1-58Trip Odometer ................................................................................. 1-57Trunk Lid .......................................................................................... 1-85

VVehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................................................. 8-2Vehicle Load Limit ............................................................................ 2-22Vehicle Specifications ........................................................................ 9-1

WWarning and Indicator Lights .......................................................... 1-52Warranties for Your Hyundai Vehicle ............................................. 8-12Windows

Power ............................................................................................ 1-11Windshield Wiper and Washer ........................................................ 1-64

Intermittent wiper operation ......................................................... 1-65Mist wiper operation .................................................................... 1-65Windshield washer operation ...................................................... 1-64

Windshield Wiper Blades ................................................................. 6-15

A000A01A-AAT

This Owner's Manual should be considered a part of the car and remain with it when it is sold for the use of the next owner.

OWNER'S I.D.

ORIGINAL OWNER

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

DELIVERY DATE

(Date Sold to Original Retail Purchaser)

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

CITY STATE ZIP CODE

Seoul Korea

Printing: MAY. 04, 2005Publication No.: A3KO-EU55CPrinted in Korea

SERVICE STATION INFORMATIONFUEL:UNLEADED gasoline onlyPump Octane Rating of 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or higher.

FUEL TANK CAPACITYUS.gal (Imp.gal., liter) 17.7 (14.7, 67)

TIRE PRESSURE:See the label on the driver's side of the center pillar outer panel.

OTHER TIRE INFORMATION:See pages 8-2 through 8-13.

HOOD RELEASE:Pull handle under left side of dash.

ENGINE OIL:API grade SJ, SL or ABOVE / ILSAC grade GF-3 or ABOVE and fuel efficientoil. Use SAE 5W-20, 5W-30 or 10W-30 if normal temperatures are above0°F (-18°C). See page 6-5 or 9-4.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE:HYUNDAI GENUINE PARTS MTF 75W/85 (API GL-4) Oil level shouldbe up to filler-bolt hole in housing beside differential.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE:Your Hyundai automatic transaxle is specially designed to operate withHYUNDAI GENUINE ATF SP III, DIAMOND ATF SP III, SK ATF SPIII or other brands meeting the SP III specification approved by Hyundai MotorCo.. Damage caused by a nonspecified fluid is not covered by your new vehiclelimited warranty.

QUICK INDEXo Car will not start ....................................................................... 3-2o Flat tire ..................................................................................... 3-6o Warning light/chime comes on ................................... 1-52 ~ 1-55o Engine overheats ...................................................................... 3-4o Towing of your vehicle ........................................................... 3-11o Starting the engine ................................................................... 2-4o Driving tips for first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) .......................... 1-3o Scheduled maintenance ............................................................ 5-4o Reporting safety defects ......................................................... 8-14

nfhma-11.p65 5/4/2005, 1:53 PM2

Manual 2005 Sonata

Documents